Honda CRV Owner’s Manual 2021

Owner’s Manual

2021 CR-V

 

Honda CRV Owner’s Manual 2021 Download

Event Data Recorders

 

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice

This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety

 

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels – on the vehicle.
Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
Safety Headings – such as Important Safety Precautions.
Safety Section – such as Safe Driving.
Instructions – how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information – please read it carefully.

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

Safe Driving P. 35
For Safe Driving P. 36 Seat Belts P. 41 Airbags P. 50

Instrument Panel P. 83
Indicators P. 84 Gauges and Displays P. 118

2 Controls P. 137

Clock P. 138 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 140

Moonroof* P. 171 Panoramic Roof*1 P. 172

Adjusting the Seats P. 203

2 Features P. 239

Audio System P. 240 Audio System Basic Operation P. 246, 267

Customized Features P. 359, 366 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 393

Driving P. 457
Before Driving P. 458 Towing a Trailer P. 463

Parking Your Vehicle P. 552 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 558

Maintenance P. 565
Before Performing Maintenance P. 566 Maintenance MinderTM P. 569 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 592 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 609

Handling the Unexpected P. 617
Tools P. 618 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 619

Overheating P. 633 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 635

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 647

Information P. 649
Specifications P. 650 Identification Numbers P. 652

Emissions Testing P. 655 Warranty Coverages P. 657

Child Safety P. 66 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 80 Safety Labels P. 81

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 154

Security System P. 165

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 168

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 175

Adjusting the Mirrors P. 201

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 213

Climate Control System P. 233

Audio Error Messages P. 337

General Information on the Audio System P. 342

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 396, 420

Compass* P. 454

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 469

When Driving P. 471

Braking P. 534

Refueling P. 560

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 563

Turbo Engine Vehicle P. 564

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 575

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 587

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 596

Battery P. 605

Remote Transmitter Care P. 607

Cleaning P. 610

Accessories and Modifications P. 615

Engine Does Not Start P. 626

If the Battery Is Dead P. 629

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 632

Fuses P. 641

Emergency Towing P. 646

Refueling P. 648

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 653

Reporting Safety Defects P. 654

Authorized Manuals P. 660

Customer Service Information P. 661

Contents

Quick Reference Guide P. 6

Safe Driving P. 35

Instrument Panel P. 83

Controls P. 137

Features P. 239

Driving P. 457

Maintenance P. 565

Handling the Unexpected P. 617

Information P. 649

Index P. 663

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

 

❚System Indicators (P84)

❚Gauges (P118)

❚Driver Information Interface (P119)

❚Hazard Warning Button ❚Audio System (P246, 267)

❚Navigation System*

() See the Navigation System Manual

❚Rear Defogger (P196)

❚Heated Door Mirror Button* (P196)

❚Climate Control System (P233)

❚Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P230)

❚ENGINE START/STOP Button* (P176)

❚Ignition Switch* (P175)

❚Steering Wheel Adjustments (P200)

❚ (Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P520)

❚Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button (P509)

❚Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button (P546)

❚Heated Windshield Button* (P197)

❚Power Tailgate Button* (P158)

6

❚Headlights/Turn Signals (P180, 181)

❚Fog Lights* (P185)

Quick

❚LaneWatchTM* (P525)

❚Brightness Control (P194)

GuideReference

(Display/Information) Button

(P119, 268)

(TRIP) Knob (P120)

❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow Buttons (P491)

 

❚Wipers/Washers (P191)

❚Interval Button (P501)

❚Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button

(P511)

❚MAIN Button (P492)

❚Heated Steering Wheel Button* (P229)

❚Horn (Press an area around .)

❚Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*

() See the Navigation System Manual

❚Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P396, 420)

❚ENTER Button (P119, 243)

❚ / / / Buttons (P119, 243)

* Not available on all models 7

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Memory Buttons* (P 199)

❚SET Button* (P 199)

❚Interior Fuse Box (P642)

❚Driver’s Front Airbag (P53)

❚Rearview Mirror (P201)

❚Electric Parking Brake Switch

(P534)

❚Automatic Brake Hold Button

(P538)

❚Passenger’s Front Airbag

(P53)

❚Shift Lever (P480)

❚Auto Idle Stop OFF Button

(P483)

❚ECON Button (P488)

❚Glove Box (P217)

❚USB Port(s) (P241)

❚Wireless Charger* (P223)

❚Accessory Power Socket

❚Hood Release Handle (P576)

(P222)

❚Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P561)

❚Driver’s Pocket ❚Power Window Switches (P168)

❚Door Mirror Controls (P202)

❚Master Door Lock Switch (P 152)

8

Accessory Power Socket* (P222)
Cargo Area Light (P216)
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P47)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P74)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P76)
Rear Map Lights (P216)
Side Curtain Airbags (P60)
Ceiling Light (P213)
Seat Belts (P41)
Moonroof Switch* (P171)
Panoramic Roof Switch* (P172)

❚Front Map Lights (P215)

❚Sunglasses Holder (P228)

❚Sun Visors

❚Vanity Mirrors

❚Center Console Box (P218)

❚Front Seat (P203)

❚Side Airbags (P58)

❚USB Ports* (P241)

❚Rear Seat Heater Buttons*

(P231)

❚Coat Hook (P226)

Grab Handle
Rear Seat (P207)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P71)
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 9

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Maintenance Under the Hood (P575)

❚Windshield Wipers (P191, 592)

❚Power Door Mirrors (P202)

❚Side Turn Signal Lights* (P180, 589)

❚Door Lock/Unlock Control (P143)

❚Headlights (P181, 587)

❚Front Turn Signal/Front Side Marker Lights

(P180, 181, 589)

❚Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P181, 190, 589)

❚Tires (P596, 619)

❚Fog Lights* (P185, 589)

❚How to Refuel (P561)

❚High-Mount Brake Light (P591)

❚Rear Wiper (P193, 594)

❚Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P154)

❚Multi-View Rear Camera (P558)

❚Rear License Plate Light (P591)

❚Tailgate Outer Handle (P163)

❚Taillights (P590)

❚Back-Up Lights (P590)

❚Brake/Taillights (P589)

❚Rear Turn Signal Lights (P589)

❚Rear Side Marker Lights (P589)

10

Auto Idle Stop Function

 

To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P482)

At

Continuously variable transmission

Engine status

Deceleration

brake pedal.

On

Stop the vehicle and depress the

Stop

U.S.

Canada

Keep the brake pedal

With the automatic brake hold system activated,

you can release the brake pedal when the

Off

depressed.

indicator comes on.

Start-up

Release the brake pedal.

With the automatic brake hold system activated,

Restarting

depress the accelerator pedal.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 11

Quick Reference Guide

Eco Assist® System (P488)

 

Ambient Meter

The color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the
vehicle is being driven in a fuel

efficient manner.

ECON Button (P488)

Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P95)

Comes on when ECON mode is on.

The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.

12

Safe Driving (P35)

 

Airbags (P50)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P66)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P80)

Quick Reference Guide

Before Driving Checklist (P458)

Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P41)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.

● Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

13

Instrument Panel (P83)

 

Gauges (P 118)/Driver Information Interface (P119)/System Indicators (P84)

Quick Reference Guide

Tachometer

Immobilizer System Indicator/

Security System Alarm Indicator

System Indicators

Lamp

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA®) System

Indicator

Shift Lever Position

Vehicle Stability AssistTM

Indicator/Transmission

(VSA®) OFF Indicator

System Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold

Temperature Gauge

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

System Indicator

U.S.

Automatic Brake Hold

Indicator

System Indicators

Lights Indicators

Canada

ECON Mode Indicator

System Message

Lights On Indicator

U.S.

Parking Brake and

Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Brake System

Low Tire Pressure/

Canada Indicator (Red)

TPMS Indicator

Fog Light Indicator*

U.S.

Parking Brake and

Turn Signal and

Auto High-beam

Brake System

Hazard Warning

Canada

Indicator (Amber)

Indicators

System Indicator

System Indicators

Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)/ Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber/ Green)

Road Departure

Mitigation (RDM)

Indicator

Collision Mitigation

Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) Indicator

Lane Keeping Assist

System (LKAS)

Indicator (Amber/

Green)

Blind spot information System Indicator*

14

Controls (P137)

Clock (P138)

Models with color audio system

a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.

b Rotate to change hour, then press

.

c Rotate to change minute, then press .

d Select SET, then press .

These indications are used to show how to operate the Selector knob.

Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Models with navigation system

 

The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

Models with Display Audio

a Select the (HOME) icon, then select Settings.

b Select Clock, then Clock Adjustment.

c Touch the respective 3 / 4 icon to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

d Select OK.

ENGINE START/STOP Button* (P176)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 15

Quick Reference Guide

Turn Signals (P180)

Turn Signal Control Lever Right

Left

Lights (P181)

Light Control Switches

High Beam

Low Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

 

(P191)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

MIST

OFF

AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies

automatically

INT*2: Low speed with

intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward

you to spray

washer fluid.

Adjustment Ring

(-: Low Sensitivity*1

(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High Sensitivity*1

(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2

*1: Models with automatic intermittent wipers

*2: Models without automatic intermittent wipers

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Steering Wheel (P200)

To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
16

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside

(P151)

Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Tailgate (P154)

 

Models with Hands Free Access

Use a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the smart entry remote.

1 sec.

Outer

Handle

Models without smart entry system

With all the doors unlocked, press the tailgate outer handle, and lift open the tailgate.
Models with smart entry system

Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock and open the tailgate when you have the smart entry remote on you.
Models with power tailgate

Press the power tailgate button on the driver side control panel, or press the remote transmitter to unlock and open the tailgate when you have the smart entry remote on you.
Quick Reference Guide

17

Quick Reference Guide

Power Door Mirrors

(P202)

With the ignition switch in ON w*1, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P168)

 

With the ignition switch in ON w*1, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Indicator Power Window Lock Button

Window Switch

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

18

Climate Control System (P233)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Models without SYNC button

Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(Recirculation) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

Fan Control Dial

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(MODE Control) Button

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

Quick Reference Guide

19

Models with SYNC button

 

Quick Reference Guide

(CLIMATE) Button

Driver’s side Temperature

Control Dial

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Audio/Information Screen

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

Passenger’s side Temperature

Control Dial

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

20

3 or 4

Features (P239)

Audio Remote Controls

(P243)

3 / 4 / / Button

(+ / (- Bar

ENTER Button (Display/ Information) Button

+ / – Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.

3 / 4 Button
Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio mode as follows:

Models with color audio system

FM1/FM2/AM/USB or iPod/Pandora®/ Bluetooth® Audio

Models with Display Audio

FM/AM/SiriusXM®*/USB/iPod/ Bluetooth® Audio/Pandora®*/Apps*/ Audio Apps*

Models with Display Audio

 

ENTER Button
When listening to the radio and SiriusXM®*
a Press ENTER to switch the display to a preset list you stored in the preset buttons.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then press ENTER.

When listening to a USB flash drive
a Press ENTER to display the folder list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.

c Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in that folder.

d Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.

When listening to an iPod
a Press ENTER to display the iPod music list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a category.

c Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.

d Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then

press ENTER.

u Press ENTER and press

repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

When listening to Pandora®*
a Press ENTER to display the station list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then

press ENTER.

When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
a Press ENTER to display the track list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then

press ENTER.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 21

Quick Reference Guide

/ Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.

USB device:

Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.

Pandora®*:

Press to skip to the next track. Press and hold to select the next or previous station.

(Display/Information) Button Press to change contents.
2 Driver Information Interface

(P119)

 

22

Audio system (P240)

 

Models with color audio system (P246)

Audio/Information Screen

(Day/Night) Button

RADIO Button

(Phone) Button

MEDIA Button

(Sound) Button

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Selector Knob

(Seek/Skip) Button

MENU/CLOCK Button

(Seek/Skip) Button

(Back) Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 23

Models with Display Audio (P267)

 

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

 

Quick Reference Guide

Driver Information Interface

*

(Home) Icon

(Map) Icon*

(Audio) Icon

(Phone) Icon

(Back) Icon

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)

Knob

(Day/Night) Icon

Compass Icon*

Audio/Information Screen

(Instrument Panel) Icon

24

Driving (P457)

 

Continuously Variable Transmission (P480)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Shifting
Park

Release Button

Shift Lever

Turn off or start the engine.

Transmission is locked.

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive

Normal driving.

Quick Reference Guide

Drive (S)

Better acceleration
Used to increase engine braking
Used when going up or down hills
Low

Used to further increase engine braking
Used when going up or down hills
Depress the brake pedal and press the

release button to move out of (P.

Press the release button to

move the shift lever.

Move the shift lever without

pressing the release button.

* Not available on all models 25

Quick Reference Guide

VSA® On and Off (P520)

 

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (P528)

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
CMBSTM On and Off

(P546)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
26

Refueling (P560)

 

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity:14 US gal (53 L)

a Pull the fuel fill door release handle.

b After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

Quick Reference Guide

27

Honda Sensing®

 

Quick Reference Guide

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located in the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rear view mirror.

The camera is located

behind the rearview

mirror.

Front Sensor Camera

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is

inside the front grille.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (P491)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

(P507)

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P511)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P542)

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

28

Maintenance (P565)

 

Under the Hood (P575)

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

Wiper Blades (P592)

fluid. Add when necessary.

● Replace blades if they leave streaks

● Check brake fluid.

across the windshield or become noisy.

● Check the battery condition monthly.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

Tires (P596)

Lights (P587)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

● Check tire pressures regularly.

● Install snow tires for winter

driving.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

Quick Reference Guide

29

Quick Reference Guide

Handling the Unexpected (P617)

 

Flat Tire (P619)

Engine Won’t Start (P626)

● Park in a safe location and replace the

● If the battery is dead, jump start using a

flat tire with the compact spare tire in the

booster battery.

cargo area.

Overheating (P633)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Indicators Come On

(P635)

Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual.
Blown Fuse (P641)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Emergency Towing (P646)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
30

What to Do If

 

U.S. models without smart entry system

The ignition switch does not turn from 0 to q. Why?

Canadian models

The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?

● The steering wheel may be locked.

U.S. models without smart entry system

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.

Canadian models

Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Quick Reference Guide

Models without smart entry system The shift lever should be moved to P.

The ignition switch does

not turn from q to 0 and

I cannot remove the key.

Why?

Models with smart entry system

The power mode does not

change from ACCESSORY

to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Why?

31

Quick Reference

Why does the brake pedal This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a

 

pulsate slightly when problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

applying the brakes? pump the brake pedal.

uAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P540)

Guide

The rear door cannot be

opened from inside the

vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

after I unlocked the doors?

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the

The exterior lights are left on.

driver’s door?

The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

Models without smart entry system

The key is left in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
32

Models with walk away auto lock®

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.

 

uLocking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock®) (P144)

Quick Reference

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are

sound when I start driving?

not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal

parking brake switch does

depressed.

not release the parking

brake. Why?

Depressing the accelerator

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pedal does not release the

Check if the transmission is in P or N. If so, select any other

parking brake

position.

automatically. Why?

Why do I hear a screeching

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

sound when I apply the

inspected by a dealer.

brake pedal?

Guide

33

Quick Reference Guide

I’m seeing an amber

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If

indicator of a tire with an

you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate

exclamation point. What is

the system.

that?

uTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P528)

 

34

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Front Airbags (SRS) ……………………….

53

Safety Labels

Important Safety Precautions…………..

36

Side Airbags…………………………………

58

Label Locations …………………………….

81

Important Handling Information………

38

Side Curtain Airbags ……………………..

60

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features…………

39

Airbag System Indicators………………..

62

Safety Checklist ……………………………

40

Airbag Care …………………………………

65

Seat Belts

Child Safety

About Your Seat Belts ……………………

41

Protecting Child Passengers ……………

66

Fastening a Seat Belt ……………………..

45

Safety of Infants and Small Children…….

68

Seat Belt Inspection……………………….

49

Safety of Larger Children ……………….

78

Airbags

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Airbag System Components ……………

50

Carbon Monoxide Gas …………………..

80

Types of Airbags …………………………..

53

35

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

 

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

 

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

36

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

 

Safe Driving

37

For Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving

 

Important Handling Information

 

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information

 

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:

Precautions While Driving P. 478
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 469
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

38

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

9

8

9

6

10

7

8

10

11

7

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

6

Seat Belts

7

Front Airbags

8

Side Airbags

9

Side Curtain Airbags

10

Door Locks

11

Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

Safe Driving

 

39

For Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving

 

Safety Checklist

 

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 151

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 203

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 209

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 45

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 66

1Safety Checklist

 

If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 103
40

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

 

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 74
1About Your Seat Belts

 

WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 41

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:

All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts

 

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.

42

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Reminder
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts.

 

If the ignition switch is turned to ON w*1 and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.

1Seat Belt Reminder

 

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.

The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

Protecting Child Passengers P. 66
Safe Driving

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 43

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.

 

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

44

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

 

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

Adjusting the Seats P. 203
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

 

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in.

Safe Driving

 

Latch

 

Plate

Buckle

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

Then smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

About Your Seat Belts P. 41
Seat Belt Inspection P. 49
Continued 45

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

Lap belt

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

as low as

possible

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

 

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

Move the anchor up and down while pulling the shoulder anchor outward.
Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

Pull

outward

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

46

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

 

Small Latch Plate

 

Latch Plate

 

Small Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle

 

Latch

Plate

Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.
Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Safe Driving

Buckle

Continued 47

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

 

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

 

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:

When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
48

Seat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection

 

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

 

WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Safe Driving

 

49

Airbags

Airbag System Components

 

DrivingSafe

8

10

9

8

7

11

6

8

8

8

8

50

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that, when the vehicle is on, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

fDriver’s seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver’s seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

hImpact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.

jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

kA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 51

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving

 

Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

 

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

52

AirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags

 

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

 

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system.

Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Types of Airbags

 

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 53

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

 

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

1How the Front Airbags Work

 

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

54

When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seatbelt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seatbelt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection.

When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

 

Safe Driving

Continued 55

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

1Advanced Airbags

 

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a

Safe Driving

Driver’s

 

Seat

Position

Sensor

 

Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors

The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger’s airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 63
crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position or passenger’s occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

Airbag System Indicators P. 62
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:

The occupant is sitting in an upright position, wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back pocket.
The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard are not obstructed by any object.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
56

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

1Advanced Airbags

 

There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 63

The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 611

Safe Driving

 

57

AirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Airbags

 

The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-backs.

 

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing

Location

1Side Airbags

 

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the airbag may not deploy when there is no passenger in the front passenger seat.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

58

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe

It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

 

Safe Driving

59

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Curtain Airbags

 

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the

 

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

1Side Curtain Airbags

 

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

60

Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

 

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Safe Driving

61

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving

 

Airbag System Indicators

 

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the ignition switch is turned to

ON w*1

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

 

WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

62

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

U.S. Canada

 

When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s airbag has been turned off.

This occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:

• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is

not excessively reclined.

• The occupant is not leaning against the door or

center console.

• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front

of them.

• There are no objects hanging from the front

passenger’s seat.

Safe Driving

 

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

Child Safety P. 66
If the indicator is on in the event of a crash,

the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.

• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back

pocket.

• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

• There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat back.

• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger’s seat.

• There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned

objects can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is

set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An

improperly placed mat can interfere with the

advanced airbag sensors.

• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

Continued 63

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate

the front passenger’s airbag.

If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set

forth in the above bullet points on the previous page

are met.

If the above conditions are met and the indicator is

still on, then with the transmission in park, turn the

ignition off and back on.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:

All of the above conditions are met, and the indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front

seat when the indicator is on.

64

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care

 

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

 

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

 

65

Child Safety

Safe Driving

 

Protecting Child Passengers

 

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a

child sitting in the front seat.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle.

• Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

66

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Safety Labels P. 81
Safe Driving

 

67

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system.

Airbags P. 50
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

1Protecting Infants

 

WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position:

The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

68

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Smaller Children

 

WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Safe Driving

 

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Continued 69

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat

 

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

70

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in any rear seat. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Safe Driving

 

Lower

Anchors

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat.

u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

Rigid Type object.

Continued 71

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Flexible Type

Outer position

Tether

Strap

Hook

 

Anchor

 

Center position

Cover

Outer position

Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Go to step 7.
Center position

 

Put the head restraint to its upper-most position.
Open the anchor cover.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Center Lower Anchor

72

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

5. Route the tether strap through the head

Center position

Anchor

restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not

twisted.

 

Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

Safe

 

Tether Strap Hook

All models

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
Driving

Continued 73

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt if it is completely retracted it unlocks wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked.

u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

74

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 75

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether

 

Safe Driving

 

Anchor Fitting

 

Tether Anchor Points

 

Tether

Strap

Hook

Anchor

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

A tether anchor point is provided behind each rear seating position.

If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

Using an outer anchor
Put the head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Using the center anchor
Put the head restraint to its upper-most position.
Open the anchor cover.
Route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Always use a tether for forward facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

76

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

Safe Driving

77

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist

• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat?

• Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child’s neck and arm?

• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

• Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

 

WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

78

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations.

 

Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

1Booster Seats

 

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

Safe Driving

 

79

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Safe Driving

 

Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

• The exhaust system may have been damaged.

• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

80

Safety Labels

Label Locations

 

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

for a replacement.

Safe

Sun Visor

Driving

U.S. models only

Canadian models

Air Conditioner System

U.S. models

Dashboard

Sun Visor

U.S. models only

U.S. models only

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

81

 

82

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators

Driver Information Interface Warning and

Information Messages 103

Gauges and Displays

Gauges 118

Driver Information Interface 119

83

Indicators

 

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Make sure

you turn the ignition switch to ON

the parking brake is released. Check the

(w*1, then goes off if the parking

brake fluid level.

brake has been released.

2 What to do when the indicator

Comes on when the parking brake

comes on while driving P. 637

is applied, and goes off when it is

Comes on along with the brake

released.

system indicator (amber) –

Comes on when the brake fluid

Immediately stop in a safe place. Contact

level is low.

a dealer for repair. The brake pedal

U.S.

Comes on if there is a problem

becomes harder to operate. Depress the

with the brake system.

pedal further than you normally do.

Parking Brake

The beeper sounds and the

Comes on along with the ABS

indicator comes on if you drive

indicator – Have your vehicle checked by

and Brake

Canada

with the parking brake not fully

a dealer.

System Indicator

released.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

(Red)

Comes on for about 15 seconds

Comes On or Blinks P. 637

Blinks and the brake system indicator

when you pull the electric parking

(Red)

brake switch while the ignition

(amber) comes on at the same time –

There is a problem with the electric

switch is in LOCK (0*1.

Stays on for about 15 seconds

parking brake system. The parking brake

may not be set.

when you turn the ignition switch

Avoid using the parking brake and have

to LOCK (0*1 while the electric

your vehicle checked by a dealer

parking brake is set.

immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes On or Blinks at the Same

Time When the Brake System

Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 638

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

84

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

U.S.

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer.

(w*1, then goes off.

Comes on while driving – Avoid using

Comes on if there is a problem

the parking brake and have your vehicle

with a system related to braking

checked by a dealer immediately.

other than the conventional brake

system.

Comes on if there is a problem

with the electric parking brake

U.S.

system or the automatic brake

Parking Brake

hold system.

Canada

and Brake

Canada

System Indicator

(Amber)

(Amber)

● Comes on if the parking brake and

● Drive a short distance at more than 12

brake system is deactivated

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

temporarily after the battery has

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

been disconnected, then re-

checked by a dealer.

connected.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 85

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on if there is a problem

Make sure the total load is within the

U.S.

with the radar sensor.

Maximum Load Limit.

Parking Brake

Indicator may come on temporarily

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 461

and Brake

when the Maximum Load Limit is

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Canada

exceeded.

checked by a dealer.

System Indicator

(Amber)

(Amber)

Comes on for a few seconds when
Automatic Brake

you turn the ignition switch to ON

Hold System

(w*1, then goes off.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

Indicator

Comes on when the automatic

brake hold system is on.

Comes on for a few seconds when

U.S.

you turn the ignition switch to ON

Automatic Brake

(w*1, then goes off.

Comes on when the automatic

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

Hold Indicator

brake hold is activated.

Canada

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

86

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when you turn the

Comes on while driving – Immediately

Low Oil Pressure

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

stop in a safe place.

goes off when the engine starts.

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Indicator

Comes on when the engine oil

Comes On P. 635

pressure is low.

Comes on when you turn the

Readiness codes are part of the on board

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

diagnostics for the emissions control

goes off when the engine starts, or

systems.

after several seconds if the engine

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 655

did not start. If “readiness codes”

Comes on while driving – Have your

Malfunction

have not been set, it blinks five

vehicle checked by a dealer.

times before it goes off.

Blinks while driving – Stop in a safe

Indicator Lamp

Comes on if there is a problem

place where there are no flammable

with the emissions control system.

objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes

Blinks when a misfire in the

or more, and wait for it to cool down.

engine’s cylinders is detected.

Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Comes On or Blinks P. 636

Comes on when you turn the

Comes on while driving – Turn off the

Charging System

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

climate control system and rear defogger

goes off when the engine starts.

in order to reduce electricity

Indicator

Comes on when the battery is not

consumption.

charging.

2 If the Charging System Indicator

Comes On P. 635

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 87

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Shift Lever

Indicates the current shift lever

Position

position.

2 Shifting P. 480

Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when

Blinks while driving – Avoid sudden

Transmission

you turn the ignition switch to ON

starts and acceleration and have your

(w*1, then goes off.

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

System Indicator

Blinks if the transmission system

has a problem.

Comes on and the beeper sounds

The beeper stops and the indicator goes

if you are not wearing a seat belt

off when you and the front passenger

when you turn the ignition switch

fasten their seat belts.

to ON (w*1.

Stays on after you or the front

Seat Belt

If the front passenger is not

passenger has fastened the seat belt

wearing a seat belt, the indicator

– A detection error may have occurred in

Reminder

comes on a few seconds later.

the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by

Indicator

Blinks while driving if either you or

a dealer.

the front passenger has not

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 43

fastened a seat belt. The beeper

sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

88

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the fuel reserve is

Comes on – Refuel your vehicle as soon

Low Fuel

running low (approximately 2.1

as possible.

U.S. gal/8.0 liter left).

Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a

Indicator

Blinks if there is a problem with the

dealer.

fuel gauge.

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer. With this indicator

System (ABS)

(w*1, then goes off.

on, your vehicle still has normal braking

Indicator

If it comes on at any other time,

ability but no anti-lock function.

there is a problem with the ABS.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 540

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly or does not come

you turn the ignition switch to ON

on at all – Have your vehicle checked by

(w*1, then goes off.

a dealer.

Supplemental

Comes on if a problem with any of

Restraint System

the following is detected:

Indicator

– Supplemental restraint system

– Side airbag system

– Side curtain airbag system

– Seat belt tensioner

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 89

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer.

(w*1, then goes off.

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka

Blinks when VSA® is active.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC),

Vehicle Stability

Comes on if there is a problem

System P. 519

with the VSA® system or hill start

AssistTM (VSA®)

System Indicator

assist system.

Comes on if the VSA® system is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w*1, then goes off.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 520

Vehicle Stability

Comes on when you partially

disable VSA®.

AssistTM (VSA®)

OFF Indicator

Comes on if the VSA® system is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

90

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when you turn the

Stays on constantly or does not come

Electric Power

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

on at all – Have your vehicle checked by

Steering (EPS)

goes off when the engine starts.

a dealer.

System Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)

with the EPS system.

System Indicator Comes On P. 639

Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Stop in a safe

you turn the ignition switch to ON

place, check tire pressures, and inflate the

(w*1, then goes off.

tire(s) if necessary.

May come on briefly if the ignition

Stays on after the tires are inflated to

switch is turned to ON (w*1 and

the recommended pressures – The

Low Tire

the vehicle is not moved within 45

system needs to be calibrated.

seconds, to indicate the calibration

2 TPMS Calibration P. 529

Pressure/TPMS

process is not yet complete.

Indicator

Comes on and stays on when:

– One or more tires’ pressures are

determined to be significantly

low.

– The system has not been

calibrated.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 91

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Blinks for about one minute, and

Blinks and remains on – Have your

then stays on if there is a problem

vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle

with the TPMS, or when a compact

is fitted with a compact spare, get your

Low Tire

spare tire is temporarily installed.

regular tire repaired or replaced, and put

back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Pressure/TPMS

Indicator

Comes on if the TPMS is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

Comes on along with a beep when

While the indicator is on, press the

a problem is detected. A system

(display/information) button to see the

message on the driver information

message again.

interface appears at the same

Refer to the Indicators information in this

System Message

time.

chapter when a system message appears

on the driver information interface. Take

Indicator

the appropriate action for the message.

The driver information interface does not

return to the normal screen unless the

warning is canceled, or the

button

is pressed.

92

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Blink when you operate the turn

Does not blink or blinks rapidly

Turn Signal and

signal lever.

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 589

Hazard Warning

Blinks along with all turn signals

Indicators

when you press the hazard

warning button.

High Beam

Comes on when the high beam

Indicator

headlights are on.

Auto High-beam

Comes on when all the operating

conditions of the Auto high-beam

2 Auto High-Beam P. 186

System Indicator

system are met.

Comes on when the light switch

If you remove the key from the ignition

Lights On

in a position other than OFF or

switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a

Indicator

when the switch is set to AUTO

chime sounds when the driver’s door is

and the exterior lights come on.

opened.

Fog Light

Comes on when the fog lights are

on.

Indicator*

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 93

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Blinks if the immobilizer system

Blinks – You cannot start the engine.

Models without

cannot recognize the key

Depress the brake pedal, then turn the

smart entry system

information.

ignition switch to LOCK (0*1. Pull the key

out*2, and then insert the key and turn it

to ON (w*1 again.

Repeatedly blinks – The system may be

malfunctioning. Have your vehicle

Immobilizer

checked by a dealer.

System Indicator

Do not attempt to alter this system or add

Models with smart

Indicator

other devices to it. Electrical problems can

entry system

occur.

Blinks when the security system

Security System

alarm has been set.

2 Security System Alarm* P. 165

Alarm Indicator

Indicator

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the ignition on.

* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

you set the power mode to ON,

then goes off.

Stays on while blind spot

Blind spot

information system is turned off.

information

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice

Comes on while driving – Remove the

System

accumulates in the vicinity of

obstacle in the vicinity of sensor.

Indicator*

sensor.

2 Blind spot information System*

P. 522

Comes on if there is a problem

Comes on while driving – Have your

with the system.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

ECON Mode

Comes on when you press the

ECON button.

2 ECON Button P. 488

Indicator

Auto Idle Stop

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is

in operation. The engine

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 482

Indicator (Green)

automatically shuts off.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 95

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds

when you turn the ignition switch

to ON (w*1, then goes off.

Auto Idle Stop

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop

System Indicator

system has been turned off by the

2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 483

(Amber)

Auto Idle Stop OFF button.

• Blinks if there is a problem with

• Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a

the Auto Idle Stop system.

dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

when you turn the ignition switch

checked by a dealer.

to ON (w*1, then goes off.

Road Departure

Comes on if there is a problem

with the RDM system.

Mitigation (RDM)

Indicator

Comes on if the RDM is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

96

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the RDM system

Indicator may come on temporarily when

shuts itself off.

passing through an enclosed space, such

as a tunnel.

The area around the radar sensor is

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with

a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time

to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

Road Departure

the indicator does not go off even after

you clean the sensor cover.

Mitigation (RDM)

2 Collision Mitigation Braking

Indicator

SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 542

Comes on when the RDM system

Stays on – The temperature inside the

shuts itself off.

camera is too high.

Use the climate control system to cool

down the camera.

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 97

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the RDM system

Stays on – The area around the camera is

shuts itself off.

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with

a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

Road Departure

the indicator and message come back on

after you cleaned the area around the

Mitigation

camera.

(RDM) Indicator

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 461

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Have your

Control (ACC)

you turn the ignition switch to ON

vehicle checked by a dealer.

with Low Speed

(w*1, then goes off.

Follow Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

(Amber)

with ACC with Low Speed Follow.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

98

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on if the ACC with Low

Drive a short distance at more than 12

Speed Follow is deactivated

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

Adaptive Cruise

temporarily after the battery has

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

been disconnected, then re-

checked by a dealer.

Control (ACC)

connected.

with Low Speed

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

Follow Indicator

(Amber)

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 461

ACC with Low Speed Follow has

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

been automatically canceled.

checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on when you press the

Control (ACC)

MAIN button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

with Low Speed

Low Speed Follow P. 491

Follow Indicator

(Green)

Lane Keeping

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer.

Assist System

(w*1, then goes off.

(LKAS) Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

(Amber)

with the LKAS.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 99

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Lane Keeping

Comes on when you press the

Assist System

MAIN button.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(LKAS) Indicator

P. 511

(Green)

Comes on for a few seconds

Stays on constantly without the

when you turn the ignition switch

CMBSTM off – Have your vehicle checked

to ON (w*1, then goes off.

by a dealer.

Comes on when you deactivate

2 Collision Mitigation Braking

Collision

the CMBSTM. A driver information

SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 542

interface message appears for

Mitigation

five seconds.

Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM)

Comes on if there is a problem

Indicator

with the CMBSTM.

Comes on if the CMBSTM is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

100

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the CMBSTM ●

Stays on – The area around the camera is

shuts itself off.

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in

a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the

indicator does not go off even after you

cleaned the camera.

Indicator may come on temporarily when

passing through an enclosed space, such as a

Collision

tunnel.

The area around the radar sensor is blocked by

Mitigation

dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place,

Braking

and wipe it off with a soft cloth. Indicator may

SystemTM

(CMBSTM)

take some time to go off after the radar sensor

Indicator

is cleaned.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the

indicator does not go off even after you clean

the sensor cover.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) P. 542

Stays on – The temperature inside the camera is

too high. Use the climate control system to cool

down the camera. The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 101

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Collision

● Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

Mitigation

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Braking

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 461

SystemTM

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

(CMBSTM)

checked by a dealer.

Indicator

102

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

 

The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (display/information) button to see the message again with the system message indicator on.

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely

Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

closed.

Appears if any door or the tailgate is opened while

driving. The beeper sounds.

Appears if there is a problem with the shutter grille,

Power output will be reduced, so you may not be able to

and the radiator coolant temperature is too high.

accelerate or maintain your current speed. Have your

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Canadian models

Appears when the washer fluid gets low.

Refill the washer fluid.

2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 586

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due

soon.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver

Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and

Information Interface P. 571

Maintenance Past Due follow.

Models with color audio system

• Appears while you are customizing the settings and

2 Customized Features P. 127

the transmission is in other than (P.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 103

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets

abnormally high.

2

Overheating P. 633

Appears when you turn the ignition switch to ON

Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.

Instrument

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

(w*1 without fastening the driver’s seat belt.

Panel

the battery.

2

Checking the Battery P. 605

Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

canceled while it is in operation.

Appears when the automatic brake hold system is

turned off.

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt.

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is

Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake

pressed without depressing the brake pedal while

pedal depressed.

the automatic brake hold is in operation.

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

 

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

104

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the parking brake is applied

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

automatically while it is in operation.

2

Parking Brake P. 534

Appears when the electric parking brake switch is

Appears while driving – Press the electric parking

pressed without depressing the brake pedal while

brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

the electric parking brake is in operation.

2

Parking Brake P. 534

Appears if there is something wrong with the vehicle

Immediately stop in a safe place.

while you are driving.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if the shift position cannot be changed to

Apply the parking brake once you have stopped.

(P due to a problem with the vehicle.

2

Parking Brake P. 534

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow has

You can resume the set speed after the condition that

been automatically canceled.

caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves.

Press the RES/+ button.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow is• Reduce the speed, then reset ACC with Low Speed
canceled due to excessive high vehicle speed.

Follow.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

• Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high

• Reduce the speed, then set ACC with Low Speed

for you to set ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Follow.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 105

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the distance between your vehicle

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC

canceled.

with Low Speed Follow is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Instrument

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

ahead of you is too close.

Follow P. 491

Panel

Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC

canceled.

with Low Speed Follow.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when the vehicle in front of you starts

Either press the RES/+ button or –/SET button, or

moving while your vehicle is stopped automatically

depress the accelerator pedal.

by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when the shift lever is moved into any

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

position other than (D or (S while ACC with Low

canceled.

Speed Follow is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

shift lever is in any position other than (D or (S.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

 

106

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

slope while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in

canceled.

operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Appears when the parking brake is applied

ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically

automatically while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in

canceled.

operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

2

Parking Brake P. 534

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

parking brake is applied.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

2

Parking Brake P. 534

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.

vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 107

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC

with Low Speed Follow.

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision

Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply

with a vehicle in front of you.

the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

2

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

P. 542

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 491

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a

2

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 507

detected line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a

2

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 507

detected lane.

You can change the setting for the road departure

mitigation system. Normal, Wide, Warning Only, and

When you selected Warning Only

Narrow can be selected.

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the

2

Customized Features P. 127, 366

vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

When you selected Normal, Wide or Narrow

The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.
108

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

When you selected Narrow

Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a

detected lane.

The Road Departure Mitigation system also steers the

vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper

● Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

sounds simultaneously.

Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover• When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a
and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in

safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The

front.

message may take some time to go off.

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
snow, fog, etc.)

does not disappear even after you clean the sensor

cover.

2 Honda Sensing® P. 28

Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor • Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
camera is too high and some driver assist systems

• Disappears – The camera has been cooled down and

cannot be activated.

the systems are activated normally.

2

Front Sensor Camera P. 489

2

Auto High-Beam P. 186

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 109

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

• Appears if the area around the front sensor camera

• When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from

a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

detecting a vehicle in front.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,

does not disappear even after you cleaned the area

snow, fog, etc.)

around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

2 Auto High-Beam P. 186

Appears if there is a problem with the Auto high-

Manually operate the headlight switch.

beam system.

If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when

this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Appears when the hood is opened.

Close the hood.

Models with smart

Appears when the engine does not restart

Follow the normal procedure to start the engine.

entry system

automatically due to the following reason:

2 Starting the Engine P. 471, 473

The hood is open.

Close the hood.

There is a problem in the system that disables Auto

Idle Stop.

Models without

smart entry system

110

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the engine stops without the

• If you want to turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1,

transmission in (P, and does not restart

change the gear position to (P.

automatically.

• If you want to start the engine, follow the normal

• Appears if you open the hood while Auto Idle Stop

procedure.

activates.

2 Starting the Engine P. 471, 473

Appears when Auto Idle Stop Display ON* or

Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens ON*

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 482

has been selected from the customization menu.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some reason.
Appears when the engine restarts automatically.
Appears when the battery temperature is around 41°F (5°C) or lower.
Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the climate control system is in use, and the
difference between the set temperature and actual

2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 484

interior temperature becomes significant.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the engine coolant temperature is too low or high.
Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate because the battery charge level is low.
Appears when the battery is low performance.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models Continued

Instrument Panel

 

111

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate

• Depress the brake pedal firmly.

because the pressure to the brake pedal is not

enough.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop Display ON* or

Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens ON*

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 482

has been selected from the customization menu.

2 Customized Features P. 127, 366

Appears when the system is under the following

• The engine restarts automatically in a few seconds.

conditions while Auto Idle Stop activates:

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 482

– The climate control system is in use, and the

2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When: P. 486

difference between the set temperature and actual

interior temperature becomes significant.

– The humidity in the interior is high.

– The battery charge level is low.

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models without smart entry system

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, then remove the

ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.

key.

Appears when the ignition key is turned to

ACCESSORY (q from ON (w. (The driver’s door is

closed.)

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

ignition key is in LOCK (0.

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears after you set the power mode to

ACCESSORY or ON.

2 Starting the Engine P. 473

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the

ENGINE START/STOP button.

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 113

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP

U.S. models

button to turn the engine off without the shift lever

Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to

in (P.

VEHICLE OFF.

Canadian models

Instrument

Move the shift lever to (P, then press the ENGINE

START/STOP button twice.

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Panel

Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the

Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

power mode is in ACCESSORY.

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button* P. 176

Appears when you close the door with the power

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back

mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside

inside the vehicle and close the door.

the vehicle.

2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 178

Appears when the smart entry remote battery

Replace the battery as soon as possible.

becomes weak.

2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 607

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too

Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE

weak to start the engine or the key is not within

START/STOP button to be touched with.

operating range to start the engine.

2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 627

A beeper sounds six times.

U.S.

Appears when the starter system has a problem.

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE

Instrument

START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing

the brake pedal and manually start the engine.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Panel

Canada

Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the

Appears constantly – Have your vehicle checked by a

smart entry system or push button starting system.

dealer.

Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner

consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.

2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 122

 

Continued 115

 

Instrument Panel

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models with LED headlight

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the light control

Appears while driving – Manually turn the lights on,

system.

and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.

Appears while driving – The headlights may not be on.

When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Models with remote engine starter

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s

door while the engine is running by remote engine

2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback* P. 475

start.

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models with power tailgate

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

U.S.

● Appears when there is a problem with the power

Manually open or close the power tailgate.

tailgate system.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Canada

Models with real time AWD with intelligent control systemTM

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the real time

The engine drives the front wheels only in this state. Have

AWD with intelligent control systemTM.

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears when the differential temperature is too

Stop in a safe place, put the transmission into (P, and

high.

idle the engine until the message disappears. If the

message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*

P. 527

 

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models 117

Gauges and Displays

Instrument Panel

 

Gauges

 

Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.

They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Gauges

Press the (display/information) button

repeatedly until the icon is shown on the driver information interface. Press ENTER, then press and hold it again. The speedometer reading and the displayed measurements will switch between mph (U.S.) and km/h (Canada).

 

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.

Overheating P. 633
118

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

Driver Information Interface

 

The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges.

It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

Switching the Display
Main displays

Press the

(display/information) button and press

or

to change the

display. Press

ENTER to see detailed information.

 

Range &

Average Speed

Turn by Turn

Driver Attention

AWD Torque

Fuel

& Elapsed Time

Directions* &

Monitor

Distribution

Optional

Compass*

Monitor*

Contents*

(Display/

Information)

Button

Press

,

,

Warning

Customize*

Phone*

Audio*

Maintenance

or

Messages

MinderTM

.

Speed Unit & Disp OFF

Press ENTER.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 119

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Trip computer
Press the (TRIP) knob to change the display.

 

Odometer

Trip A

Trip B

Outside temperature

(TRIP)

Knob

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.

Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

1Trip Meter

 

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob, or by using the customized features on the driver information interface or audio/ information display.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
120

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

 

Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 569
1Average Fuel Economy

 

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
1Elapsed Time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
1Average Speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
Instrument Panel

 

Continued 121

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the driver’s attention in the Driver Information Interface.

 

Driver Information

ENTER

Interface

(Display/

Information)

Button

 

When the (display/information) button is pressed, bars in the Driver Information Interface light up in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s attention.

Switching the Display P. 119
1Driver Attention Monitor

 

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive.

Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.

Level

122

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
If two bars light up, the Driver Attention

 

Level Low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention

 

Level Low. Time For A Break message will

appear, a beep will sound, and the steering

wheel will vibrate.

If this message appears, stop in a safe location

and rest for as long as needed.

The message will disappear when the ENTER

button is pressed or when the system has

determined that the driver is driving normally.

If the driver does not take a break and the

monitor continues to detect that the driver is

very tired, the message will appear again after

approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a

beep and steering wheel vibrations.

The message does not appear when the

traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when
• the engine is turned off.

• the driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 123

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function
the vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances.
the steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 511

the condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
it is windy.
the driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as changing lanes or accelerating.
Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function

 

The bars in the Driver Information Interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

124

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Use the customized features in the driver information interface or audio/information screen to correct the temperature.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

AWD Torque Distribution Monitor*
The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels.

 

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM* P. 527
1Outside Temperature

 

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 125

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Turn-by-Turn Directions*
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the navigation system.

Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Audio*
Show the current audio information.

Audio System Basic Operation P. 267
Phone*
Show the current phone information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 420
1Turn-by-Turn Directions*

 

The driver information interface shows a compass when the route guidance is not used.

You can select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.

Customized Features P. 366
* Not available on all models
Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Models with color audio system

 

Customized Features
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the ignition switch is in ON w, and the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift lever is in P. Select Vehicle Settings, then press the ENTER button.

 

Driver information interface:

Goes to Vehicle Settings.

1Customized Features

 

To customize other features, press the 3 / 4 button.

List of customizable options P. 130
Example of customization settings P. 134
When you customize settings:

Shift to (P.

Instrument Panel

 

Button
Press to scroll upwards.

Button
Press to scroll downwards.

ENTER Button

Press to set your

selection.

Button

Press to go to Vehicle

Settings.

Continued 127

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Customization flow
Press the button.

 

Vehicle Settings

ENTER

 

TPMS Calibration

 

Instrument Panel

ENTER

3

3

4

Driver Assist System Setup ENTER

 

3

4

3

 

4

 

Forward Collision Warning Distance

 

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

 

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

 

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

 

Driver Attention Monitor

 

Language Selection

 

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

 

4

 

Meter Setup

ENTER

3

4

 

3

 

4

“Trip A” Reset Timing

 

“Trip B” Reset Timing

 

Adjust Alarm Volume

 

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

 

Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens

 

Speed/Distance Units

 

Tachometer

 

128

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

3

4

ENTER

3

4

Lighting Setup

ENTER

3

4

 

Door Setup

ENTER

 

3

4

Maintenance Reset

 

3

4

Default All

 

3

4

Exit

 

3

 

4

 

3

 

4

Interior Light Dimming Time

 

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

 

Auto Light Sensitivity

 

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

 

Auto Door Lock

 

Auto Door Unlock

 

Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 129

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS

Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Calibration

Forward Collision

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

ON/OFF*1

Detect Beep

vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.

Driver Assist

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/

System

Mitigation Setting

mitigation system.

Warning Only

Setup

Lane Keeping Assist

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is

ON/OFF*1

Suspend Beep

suspended.

Driver Attention Monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile And Audible Alert*1/

Tactile Alert/OFF

 

*1:Default Setting

130

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Language Selection

Changes the displayed language.

English*1/Français/Español

Adjust Outside Temp.

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Display

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

When Fully Refueled/IGN

“Trip A” Reset Timing

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and

OFF/Manually Reset*1

elapsed time A.

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

When Fully Refueled/IGN

“Trip B” Reset Timing

average fuel economy B, average speed B, and

OFF/Manually Reset*1

elapsed time B.

Meter Setup

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Auto Engine Idle Stop

Turns the engine idle-stop guidance displayed in the

meter display on and off during the auto engine idle

ON/OFF*1

Guidance Screens

stop system is in operation.

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

mph∙miles*1/km/h∙km

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the

ON*1/OFF

driver information interface.

*1:Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 131

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Interior Light Dimming

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Time

after you close the doors.

Headlight Auto OFF

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

Lighting

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Setup

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Illumination Sensitivity

AUTO position.

Auto Headlight ON With

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when

the headlights automatically come on while the

ON*1/OFF

Wiper ON

headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

 

*1: Default Setting

132

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Auto Door Lock

Changes the setting for when the doors

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift

automatically lock.

from P/OFF

When Driver’s Door Opens*1/

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors

When Shifting Into Park/

automatically unlock.

When Ignition Switched

OFF/OFF

Door Setup

Key And Remote Unlock

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock

Driver Door*1/ All Doors

Mode

on the first operation of the remote or ignition key.

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

ON*1/OFF

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and

Security Relock Timer

the security system to set after you unlock the

90sec/60sec/30sec*1

vehicle without opening any door.

Maintenance

Cancels/Resets the engine oil life display when you

Cancel/All Due Items

Reset

have performed the maintenance service.

Default All

Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as

Cancel/Set

default.

 

*1: Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 133

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.

Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the ENTER button.

Press the 3 / 4 button until Meter Setup appears on the display.
Press the ENTER button.
u Language Selection appears first in the display.

 

134

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Press the 3 / 4 button until “Trip A” Reset Timing appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Fully Refueled, IGN OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit.

Press the 3 / 4 button and select When Refueled, then press the ENTER button. u The When Fully Refueled Setup screen appears, then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.

Press the 3 / 4 button until Exit appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.

Instrument Panel

 

135

136

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock 138

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions 140

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength* ..142

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside 143

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside 151

Childproof Door Locks 152

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking 153

Opening and Closing the Tailgate 154

Security System

Immobilizer System 165

Security System Alarm* 165

Opening and Closing the Windows ….

168

Daytime Running Lights ……………….

190

Moonroof* ………………………………….

171

Wipers and Washers ……………………

191

Panoramic Roof*1 …………………………

172

Brightness Control ………………………

194

Operating the Switches Around the

Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* ……..

196

Driving Position Memory System* …. 198

Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel ……….

200

Ignition Switch* ………………………….

175

Adjusting the Mirrors…………………..

201

ENGINE START/STOP Button*………..

176

Adjusting the Seats ……………………..

203

Ignition Switch and Power Mode

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items. 213

Comparison ……………………………..

179

Climate Control System

Turn Signals ……………………………….

180

Using Automatic Climate Control

233

Light Switches…………………………….

181

Synchronization Mode* ……………….

236

Fog Lights* ………………………………..

185

Automatic Climate Control Sensors ……

237

Auto High-Beam …………………………

186

(*1: Canadian models only, if equipped)

* Not available on all models 137

Clock

Controls

 

Adjusting the Clock

 

Models without navigation system

 

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON w*1.

Adjusting the Time

Models with color audio system

 

Using the MENU/CLOCK button
1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.

u Adjust Clock is selected.

2. Rotate to change hour, then press .

 

3. Rotate to change minute, then press

.

 

To enter the selection, rotate and select Set, then press .

1Adjusting the Clock

 

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.

Models with color audio system

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 Customized Features P. 359

1Using the MENU/CLOCK button

Models with color audio system

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

138

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with Display Audio

 

Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen

Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock Adjustment.
Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

 

Models with Display Audio

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock and turn the clock display on and off.

Customized Features P. 366
Models with Display Audio

The clock is automatically updated when your smartphone is connected to the audio system. You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display.

Touch the clock on the display for a few seconds.
Select Clock Adjustment.
Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.
Controls

 

139

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Controls

 

Key Types and Functions

 

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Keys
Ignition Keys with Remote

Smart Entry Remote*

Transmitter*

 

Use the key to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock the doors and tailgate. You can also lock and unlock the doors and tailgate pressing the buttons on remote transmitter.

1Key Types and Functions

 

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps protect against vehicle theft.

Immobilizer System P. 165
The keys contain precision electronics.

Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics:

Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work.

Built-in Key*

Built-in Key

Release Knob

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks.

If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

Models with remote engine starter

You can remotely start the engine using the one-way smart entry remote.

Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback* P. 475
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

Valet Key*

Gray

Key Number Tag

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock driver’s door.

Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

1Valet Key*

 

When you need to leave a key with a third party, leave the valet key.

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 141

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

 

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or to start the engine.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:

Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

Controls

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

 

Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s battery.

Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

 

Door Lock

 

Sensor

 

When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and open the tailgate.

You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the tailgate within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the tailgate outer handle.

Locking the doors and tailgate
Touch the door lock sensor on a front door or press the lock button on the tailgate.

u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets.

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors and tailgate.

No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds.

Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off immediately.

Interior Lights P. 213
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Controls

 

Lock

Button

* Not available on all models Continued 143

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

 

Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto
lock®)

When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors and tailgate closed while carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will automatically lock.

The auto lock function activates when all doors are closed, and the smart entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle.

Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote and close door(s).

While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated.

Carry the smart entry remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors will then lock.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock®)

 

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 366
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be canceled.

When all doors have been closed and the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle, or if the smart entry remote is not detected within about 5 feet (1.5 m) of the vehicle, auto lock function will not be activated.

144

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
To temporarily deactivate the function:

Set the power mode to OFF.
Open the driver’s door.
Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows:
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.

u The beeper sounds and the function is deactivated.

To restore the function:

Set the power mode to ON.
Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function.
Walk away at least more than about 5 feet (1.5 m) away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote.
1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock®)

 

The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.

The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
A door or the hood is not closed.
The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF.
The smart entry remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper

After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.

The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle through a window.
You are located too close to the vehicle.
The smart entry remote is put inside the tailgate. If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.
Controls

 

Continued 145

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate

Grab the driver’s door handle:

u The driver’s door unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger’s door handle:

u All the doors and tailgate unlock.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Controls

Press the tailgate outer handle:

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

u The tailgate unlocks.

beeper sounds twice.

2 Using the Outer Handle P. 163

Outer

Handle

 

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

 

Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be locked or unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by locking or unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.
The light flashes, and beeper sounds and unlock settings can be customized on the audio/ information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 366

* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

Ignition keys with remote transmitter

 

LED

Lock

Button Unlock

Button

Models with smart entry remote

LED

Lock

Unlock Button

Button

Locking the doors Press the lock button.
Once:

u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system* sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first push):

u The beeper sounds and verifies the security system* is set.

Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.

Once:

u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.

Twice:

u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 366
Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 127
The remote transmitter will not work when:

Ignition keys with remote transmitter

The key is in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry remote

The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

Replacing the Button Battery P. 607
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 147

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Models with Display Audio

2 Customized Features P. 366

Models with color audio system

2 Customized Features P. 127

 

Controls

148

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the smart entry remote battery or the vehicle battery is dead, use the key instead of the smart entry remote.

Fully insert the key and turn it.

 

Lock

Unlock

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 366
Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 127
Controls

 

Continued 149

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Locking the driver’s door

Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.

■ Locking the passenger’s doors

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

Lockout prevention system
Ignition keys with remote transmitter

The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch.

Models with smart entry remote

The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time.

Make sure you have the key in your hand when you lock the driver’s door, any of the other doors or the tailgate, otherwise you may end up locking the key inside the vehicle.

150

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door

 

To Lock

Lock Tab

Push the lock tab forward.

1Using the Lock Tab

 

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time.

To Unlock

■ Unlocking a door

Pull the lock tab rearward.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.

 

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.

 

u The door unlocks and opens in one motion.

Inner

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from

Handle

the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the Display Audio* or driver information interface*.

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking P. 153
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.

Childproof Door Locks P. 152
Controls

* Not available on all models Continued 151

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls

 

Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

 

To Lock

To Unlock

Master Door

Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks

 

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.

 

When opening the door
Unlock Open the door using the outside door handle.

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

 

When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

The front passenger’s door also has the master door lock switch.

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Lock

152

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode
All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Auto Door Unlocking
Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Models with Display Audio

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.

Customized Features P. 366
Models with color audio system

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface.

Customized Features P. 127
Controls

 

153

Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Controls

 

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Models without power tailgate

 

Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.

Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
All models

 

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:

u Avoid possible damage.

u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 80
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured.

Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.

When you are storing or picking up cargo from the cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*, while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.

* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuPrecautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Models with power tailgate

 

The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver side control panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*.

The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in P.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Models with power tailgate

WARNING
Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury.

Make sure everyone is clear before closing the power tailgate.

NOTICE

Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is being automatically opened or closed.

Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while in operation can deform the tailgate frame.

When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.

The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions:

You start the engine while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing.
The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.
The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.
The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
If you close the power tailgate with all the doors locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 155

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

Using the Hands Free Access*
Use a forward and back kicking motion for about 1 second under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the smart entry remote.

 

u Some exterior lights flash twice and a beeper sounds once, then the tailgate begins to move.

 

1 sec.

1Using the Hands Free Access*

 

During rain or in other instances when the vehicle becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect your foot motion.

When performing work on or around the rear section of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close the tailgate.

To prevent this from happening, select Customized Features on the audio/information screen and then select OFF for the feature.

Customized Features P. 366
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long or sweep your foot from side to side, the power tailgate does not open or close.

This function will not operate if you don’t have the smart entry remote on you. Please make sure you have the smart entry remote on you.

* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

 

u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper sounds.

Power If you press the button again while the power

Tailgate tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Button

Press the button for more than one second, and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

Customizing when to open the tailgate
Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting.

When Unlocked: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.

Customized Features P. 366
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate.

Installing aftermarket components other than genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your cargo in and out.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle.

The beeper sounds when you start driving while the power tailgate is still open, or closing.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 157

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Using the Power Tailgate Button
To open or close the power tailgate, press the power tailgate button for about one second. u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper

 

sounds.

If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the button for about one second, and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. The beeper sounds three times.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes.

Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate.

Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.

* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for no longer than one second, the tailgate opens automatically.

 

u The beeper sounds.

u If you want to open the tailgate manually, press the button for more than one second.

Outer

2 Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Handle

P. 154

If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you

do not have to unlock the tailgate before

opening it.

If you press the outer handle again while the

power tailgate is moving, it will stop.

Press the outer handle, and the power tailgate

will reverse direction.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

Do not leave the key, remote transmitter*, or smart entry remote* in the cargo area before closing the tailgate.

Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.

You can change the power tailgate operation setting on and off.

Customized Features P. 366
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 159

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Using the Tailgate Inner Button
Press the button on the tailgate to close the

 

power tailgate.

u The beeper sounds.

If you press the button again while the power

tailgate is moving, it will stop. Press and

release the button again, and the power

tailgate will reverse direction.

160

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Programming Tailgate Position
The extent to which the power tailgate automatically opens can be programed.

 

To program:

Open the tailgate to the desired position.
Press and hold the tailgate inner button until you hear short two beeps following one long buzzer.

1Programming Tailgate Position

 

If the tailgate is only slightly opened, the position cannot be programmed, even if you push the inner button.

If you want to reprogram the power tailgate to open all the way, manually raise the tailgate to its upper most position and follow the directions step 2.

Controls

 

Continued 161

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Auto-Closer
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.

Power Tailgate Fall Detection
Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.

1Auto-Closer

The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is closing.

Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching.

Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.

 

1Power Tailgate Fall Detection

If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fall detection may be activated.

Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion.

If the power tailgate fall detection constantly activates, consult at a dealer.

162

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Using the Outer Handle

When all the doors are unlocked or press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked.

 

Press the outer handle and lift open the tailgate.

Models with smart entry system

 

Outer

If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you

Handle

do not have to unlock the tailgate before

opening it.

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,

pull the tailgate down, and push it closed

from outside.

 

1Using the Outer Handle

 

Do not leave the key, remote transmitter*, or smart entry remote* in the cargo area before closing the tailgate.

Models with smart entry system

Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.

Controls

 

Inner Handle

* Not available on all models Continued 163

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Using the Remote Transmitter*
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate.

 

1Using the Remote Transmitter*

 

If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter or smart entry remote*, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

Controls

Tailgate

Unlock

Button

Tailgate

Unlock

Button

* Not available on all models
Security System

Immobilizer System

 

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch* or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button*:

Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch* or the ENGINE START/STOP button*.
Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition switch* or the ENGINE START/STOP button*.
Security System Alarm*

 

The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not go off if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system.

However, the alarm goes off if a door is opened with the key, then the shift lever is moved out of P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.

When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.

1Immobilizer System

 

NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the battery has been disconnected.

1Security System Alarm*

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system deactivates.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 165

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm*
Controls

 

To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met:

The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The hood and tailgate are closed.
All doors and tailgate are locked with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart entry system.
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or smart entry system, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

1Security System Alarm*

 

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:

Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
Moving the shift lever out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

* Not available on all models
Panic Mode
The panic button on the remote

transmitter

If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds:

The horn sounds.
Panic

• Some exterior lights flash.

Button

Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.

Panic Button

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm*

Controls

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

167

Opening and Closing the Windows

Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON w*1, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open and close all the windows.

The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.

When the power window lock button is switched on (pushed in, indicator on), you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off*1. Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse

ON

 

OFF

Power Window Lock Button

Driver’s

Window

Switch

Indicator

Front Passenger’s

Window Switch

Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

You cannot fully open the rear windows.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

168

Opening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Close

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

 

Open

Opening Windows and the Moonroof* or Panoramic Roof*1 with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and keep it pressed. If the windows and moonroof* or panoramic roof*1 stop midway, repeat the

 

Unlock procedure.

Button

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof* or panoramic roof*1.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 169

Opening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls

 

Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof* or Panoramic Roof*1 with the Key
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the

 

key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to

the central position, turn the key in the unlock

direction and hold it there.

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Close

Open

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows/

moonroof* or panoramic roof*1 at the desired

position. If you want further adjustment,

repeat the same operation.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

* Not available on all models
Moonroof*

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

 

You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Using the Moonroof Switch
1Using the Moonroof Switch

 

WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on

Open

 

Tilt

Close

Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly.

Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Opening either front door cancels this function. When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.

Opening Windows and the Moonroof* or
Panoramic Roof*1 with the Remote P. 169

Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof* or Panoramic Roof*1 with the Key P. 170
Controls

 

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

* Not available on all models 171

 

Controls

Panoramic Roof*1

Opening/Closing the Panoramic Roof

 

You can operate the panoramic roof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch 1Opening/Closing the Panoramic Roof in the front of the ceiling to open and close the panoramic roof.

 

3WARNING

Opening or closing the panoramic roof or

sunshade on someone’s hands or fingers

can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of

the panoramic roof and sunshade before

opening or closing it.

NOTICE

Opening the panoramic roof in below freezing

temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice

can damage the panoramic roof panel or motor.

The panoramic roof and sunshade can be operated

for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse

function causes the panoramic roof to change

directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing

when the panoramic roof is almost closed to ensure

that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects,

including fingers, are clear of the panoramic roof.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

172

uuPanoramic Roof*1uOpening/Closing the Panoramic Roof

Using the Sunshade Switch
Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Open

The sunshade automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the sunshade midway, touch the switch briefly.

Close

■ Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

1Opening/Closing the Panoramic Roof

 

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the panoramic roof.

Opening Windows and the Moonroof* or
Panoramic Roof*1 with the Remote P. 169

Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof* or Panoramic Roof*1 with the Key P. 170
1Using the Sunshade Switch

The sunshade can be opened or closed to adjust the amount of light that enters the cabin.

When you use the sunshade switch to open the sunshade, the panoramic roof does not move.

The sunshade cannot be fully closed if the panoramic roof is open. When you close the sunshade with the panoramic roof open, the sunshade stops slightly ahead of the panoramic roof glass. When you push the switch forward again, the sunshade and the panoramic roof close together.

Controls

 

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

* Not available on all models Continued 173

Panoramic Roof*1uOpening/Closing the Panoramic Roof
Controls

 

Using the Panoramic Roof Switch
Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Open

The panoramic roof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the panoramic glass midway, touch the switch briefly.

Close Tilt

■ Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the panoramic roof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the panoramic

roof switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

1Using the Panoramic Roof Switch

 

Comfort Position

Full Open Position

The panoramic roof cannot be fully opened in a single operation. The panoramic roof has a “comfort” position or wind noise reduction position at which the roof first stops. To open fully, pull the switch back again after the roof has stopped at this position.

Whenever the panoramic roof is opening, the sunshade moves along with it. However, when the panoramic roof is closing, the sunshade does not move.

When you tilt open the panoramic roof, the sunshade opens slightly to let in fresh air. When you close the panoramic roof from this position, the sunshade returns to its closed position.

174

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch*

 

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position.

(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.

1Ignition Switch*

 

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out.

When this happens, the following messages appear on the driver information interface:

In LOCK (0: or the symbol with a Remove
Key From Ignition

In ACCESSORY (q: or the symbol with a
Return Ignition Switch To Lock (0) Position The buzzer will stop when you take the key out.

If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 175

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
Controls

 

ENGINE START/STOP Button*

 

Changing the Power Mode

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

The button is off.

The steering wheel is locked*1.

The power to all electrical components is turned off.

ACCESSORY

The button blinks (in red).

Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

ON

The button blinks (in red).

All electrical components can be used.

Without

pressing the

brake pedal

1ENGINE START/STOP Button*

 

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

Operating Range

You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 627
Press the button without the shift lever in (P.

Shift to (P then press the button.

Press the button.

U.S. models

Shift to (P.

The power system may also start if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

*1:Except U.S. models

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.

Canadian models

When in this mode:

The steering wheel does not lock.

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

1ENGINE START/STOP Button*

 

Canadian models

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 177

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
Controls

 

Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.

Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the smart entry remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the smart entry remote in another location.

 

When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY

The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.

When the power mode is in ON
An alarm will sound both inside and outside

the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator

will appear on the instrument panel.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

 

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the warning function cancels.

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system’s operational range.

178

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

 

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Position

(with/without

the key)

Without Smart Entry

Engine is turned off and

Engine is turned off.

Normal key position

Use this position to start

System

power is shut down.

Some electrical

while driving.

the engine.

The steering wheel is

components such as the

All electrical components

The ignition switch

locked*1.

audio system and the

can be used.

returns to the ON (II)

No electrical

accessory power socket

position when you

Controls

components can be

can be operated.

release the key.

used.

 

Power Mode VEHICLE OFF ACCESSORY ON START

(LOCK)

Button is: Blinking On

With Smart Entry

Button-Off

Button-Blinking

Button-

Button-On

System and ENGINE

Engine is turned off and

Engine is turned off.

Blinking (engine is turned

● The mode automatically

START/STOP

power is shut down.

Some electrical

off)

returns to ON after the

Button

The steering wheel is

components such as the

On (engine is running)

engine starts.

locked*1.

audio system and the

● All electrical components

No electrical

accessory power socket

can be used.

components can be

can be operated.

used.

*1:Canadian models

179

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals

 

Controls

 

Right Turn

 

Left Turn

The turn signals can be used when the ignition

switch is in ON w*1.

One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release

the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals

and turn signal indicator blink three times.

This feature can be used when signaling for a

lane change.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

180

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches

Manual Operation
U.S. models

 

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Canadian models

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting or position of the ignition switch.

 

High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.

Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Canadian models

 

Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:

The transmission is in P.
The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when:

The transmission is taken out of P and the parking brake is released.
The vehicle starts to move.
1Light Switches

 

Models without smart entry system

If you remove the key from the ignition switch with the lights on, a light on reminder chime sounds when you open the driver’s door.

Models with smart entry system

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened.

All models

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

Indicators P. 84
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Controls

 

Continued 181

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

Controls

 

U.S. models

 

Canadian models

Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.

The headlights comes on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO.

u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off.

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Models without automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Models with automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

182

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.

The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

U.S. models

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting

The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

Max

Bright

High

Mid

Low

Dark

Min

U.S. models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 366
U.S. models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 127
1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

Controls

 

Continued 183

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls

 

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Models with smart entry system

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door.

Models without smart entry system

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key, and close the driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

 

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

Models with smart entry system

Customized Features P. 366
Models without smart entry system

Customized Features P. 127
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

184

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*

Fog Lights*

 

Can be used when the low beam headlights are on.

 

Rotate the switch up from the OFF position to the position.

 

Fog Light Switch

1Fog Lights*

 

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on.

Daytime Running Lights P. 190

Controls

* Not available on all models 185

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Auto High-Beam

 

The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.

 

Front Sensor Camera

 

Controls

How to Use the Auto High-Beam
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

1Auto High-Beam

 

The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

Front Sensor Camera P. 489
For the auto high-beam to work properly:

Auto High-Beam

 

Indicator

The ignition switch is in ON w*1.
The light switch is in AUTO.
The lever is in the low beam position.
The headlights have been automatically activated.
It is dark outside the vehicle.
Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard.
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera.
Do not touch the camera lens.
Light Switch

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

186

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam:

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.

• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or

oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

 

• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
There are no preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are few street lights on the road ahead.
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or less.
There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are many street lights on the road ahead.

fog, windshield frost, etc.).

• Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,

electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating

the road ahead.

• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly

changes.

• The road is bumpy or has many curves.

• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or

oncoming direction.

• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.

• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.

• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers.

• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when:

Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
The camera has detected a dense fog.
Controls

Continued 187

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Controls

 

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever:

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Using the light switch:

Turn the light switch to .

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
188

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary.

To turn the system off:

 

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks twice, release the lever.

To turn the system on:

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

 

If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.

Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.

Controls

 

189

 

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Daytime Running Lights

 

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:

The ignition switch is in ON w*1.
The headlight switch is AUTO, OFF* or .
The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers/Washers

1Wipers and Washers

 

Pull to use washer.

 

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring*

MIST

OFF

INT*2/AUTO*3

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT*2/AUTO*3, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.

 

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

If the wiper stops operating due to an obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1, then remove the obstacle.

Controls

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Models with manual intermittent operation

*3: Models with automatic intermittent operation

* Not available on all models Continued 191

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls

 

Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

 

The wipers operate intermittently, at low

speed, or at high speed and stops in

accordance with the amount of rainfall the

rainfall sensor detects.

Adjustment Ring

AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you

can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor

(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will

operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

 

Low Sensitivity

High Sensitivity

1Wipers and Washers

 

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

Rainfall Sensor

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Rear Wiper/Washer
INT: Intermittent

 

ON: Continuous wipe

OFF

Washer

Operating in reverse
The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

Washer ( )

Sprays while you rotate the switch to this

position.

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the

washer. Once released, it stops operating

after a few more sweeps.

Controls

 

When you shift the transmission to R with the windshield wipers activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

Front Wiper Position

Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)

Continuous

HI (High speed wipe)

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

193

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls

 

Brightness Control

 

With the parking lights are turned on and the ignition switch is in ON w*1, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness.

 

Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.

Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

You will hear a beeper when the brightness

Control Knob

reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after adjusting the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

1Brightness Control

 

Instrument panel brightness differs between when the exterior lights are on and when they are off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when the lights are on.

Models with headlight integration with wipers

When it is bright outside and the headlight integration with the wiper is activated, the instrument panel brightness does not change.

Turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on.

The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

194

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the driver

information interface while you are adjusting

it.

 

Controls

195

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror*
Controls

 

Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

 

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

 

Models without heated door mirror

 

The rear defogger automatically switches off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

Models with heated door mirror

 

The rear defogger and heated door mirror automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, they do not automatically switch off.

1Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

 

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged or deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

Models with heated door mirror

When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may activate automatically for 10 minutes when you set the power mode to ON.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror*
Canadian models

Heated Windshield Button
Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield at the wiper park area and along the driver side edge of the windshield when the power mode is in ON.

 

The heated windshield will automatically switch off after 15 minutes.

1Heated Windshield Button

 

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged or deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

 

Controls

197

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Driving Position Memory System*

 

You can store two driver’s seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving position memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter or the smart entry system, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.

DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2

 

Controls

1Driving Position Memory System*

 

Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.

Customized Features P. 366
* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Storing a Position in Memory
Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the

driver’s seat to the desired position.

Memory

Button 1

2. Press the SET button.

u You will hear a beep, and the memory

button indicator light will blink.

Memory

Button 2

3. Press and hold memory button 1 or 2

within five seconds of pressing the SET

button.

SET Button

u Once the seat position has been

memorized, the indicator light on the

button you pressed stays on.

Recalling the Stored Position
Move the shift lever to P.

2.

Apply the parking brake.

Memory

Button 1

3.

Press a memory button ( 1 or 2).

u You will hear a beep, and the indicator

light will blink.

Memory

Button 2

The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear a beeper, and the indicator light stays on.

1Storing a Position in Memory

 

After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when:

You do not press the memory button within five seconds.
You readjust the seat position before the double-beep.
You set the power mode to any position except ON.
1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat will stop moving if you:

Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or
(2).

Adjust the seat position.
Shift into any position except (P.
Controls

 

199

To lock

To adjust

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls

 

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

 

under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

Lever 3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever down to lock the steering wheel in position.

u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.

200

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror

 

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
1Adjusting the Mirrors

 

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

Tab Up

 

Daytime

Position

Down

Night Position

Flip the tab to switch the position.

The night position will help reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

Front Seats P. 203
Controls

 

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. This feature is always active.

 

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R.

Sensor

* Not available on all models 201

Adjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Power Door Mirrors

 

Controls

 

Selector

 

Adjustment Switch

Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

202

Adjusting the Seats

Front Seats

 

Allow sufficient space.

 

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

Move back.

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

1Adjusting the Seats

 

WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

Controls

 

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seat*

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment (Driver’s seat only)

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

* Not available on all models Continued 203

Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Controls

 

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch* Press the top: To move the lumbar support up.
Press the bottom: To move the lumbar support down.

Press the front: To increase the entire lumbar support.

Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar

 

support.

Lumbar

Support

Adjustment

Switch

* Not available on all models
Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

 

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Height Adjustment

(Driver’s seat only)

Pull up or push down the lever

to raise or lower the seat.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 205

Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,

upright position, leaving ample space

between your chest and the airbag cover in

the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust

their seat-back to a comfortable, upright

Controls

position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the

occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the

chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a

seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

 

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

 

WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

206

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Lever

1Rear Seats

 

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

 

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Pull up the lever to change the

angle.

Controls

Continued 207

Adjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats

 

Controls

 

Latch plate

 

Anchor buckle

Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 47

Lower the rear seat head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back.
The rear seat-backs can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the cargo area.

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat.

Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the tailgate open.

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 80
When returning the seat-back to its original position,

Release Lever

 

From the rear seat side

Pull the release lever and fold down the seat.
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back.

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending through the opening into the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work

Release Lever

From the cargo area side

4. Pull the release lever and fold down the

seat.

 

improperly.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 63
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving.

208

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Head Restraints

 

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Adjusting the Front Head Restraints
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear-impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.

 

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

 

1Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

In order for the head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.
Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper location.
Controls

 

Continued 209

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Position

A passenger sitting in the rear seat should

adjust the height of their head restraint to an

appropriate position before the vehicle begins

moving.

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Controls

Push it down while pressing the release

button.

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

 

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

 

WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

210

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

Controls

 

211

 

Controls

Adjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Armrest

Using the Front Seat Armrest

The console lid can be used as an armrest.

 

To adjust:

Slide the armrest to a desired position.

Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

 

212

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

Interior Light Switches
Models without smart entry system

 

Front

Off

Door Activated Position

Models with moonroof

Front

Off

Door

Activated

Position

On

Models with panoramic roof

Front

Door Activated Position

ON

The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following situations:

When any doors are opened.
You unlock the driver’s door.
Models without smart entry system

 

You remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

 

When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).

OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

1Interior Light Switches

 

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.

The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations:

When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system

When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.

Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 366
Models with color audio system

Customized Features P. 127
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:

When you lock the driver’s door.
Models without smart entry system

When you close the driver’s door with the key in the ignition switch.
Controls

 

On

Off

Models with smart entry system

When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode.
When you set the power mode to ON.
Continued 213

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls

 

Models without panoramic roof

 

Rear

On

Door Activated

Position

Off

Models with panoramic roof

Rear

 

1Interior Light Switches

 

To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the

interior light on for an extended length of time when

the engine or power system is off.

If you leave any doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

mode, or without the key in the ignition switch, the

interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

214

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Map Lights

■ Front

Models without panoramic roof

Models without panoramic roof

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the lens.

 

Models with panoramic roof Models with panoramic roof

 

The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the button.

1Map Lights

 

Models without panoramic roof

When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.

Models with panoramic roof

When the interior light switch is in the door activated position and a door is opened or interior light switch is in the ON position, the rear map light will not go off when you press the button.

Controls

 

Continued 215

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls

 

Models without panoramic roof

 

Off

On

Models with panoramic roof

 

Rear

Models without panoramic roof

The map lights can be turned on and off by

sliding the switch.

Models with panoramic roof

 

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the button.

Cargo Area Lights
The lights come on when you open the

 

tailgate.

216

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key.

 

Glove Box

1Glove Box

 

WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

 

Controls

Continued 217

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Center Console Box
You can change the position of the tray by

 

sliding it forward or back.

Tray

If you want to make greater use of the console

 

Knob

box:

Pull the knob to open the armrest.
Slide the tray back.
Hold the front of the tray and pull it up.
218

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Under-floor Storage Area
Support Rod

 

Pull the strap to open the cargo floor lid.

Storing items on the lid at the bottom position
This is convenient when storing a tall item.

Pull the strap upwards to lift the lid.
Pull the lid towards you until it disengages from the support rods.
Push the far end of the lid down to the bottom under the support rod, then lower the other end.
Controls

 

Continued 219

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Beverage Holders
Front seat beverage holders

Are located in the console between the front seats.

Rear seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.

1Beverage Holders

 

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

220

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Door side beverage holders

Front

Are located on the both of front and rear door

side pockets.

 

Rear

Controls

Continued 221

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY q or ON w*1.

Accessory power socket in the console compartment

Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

Accessory power socket (cargo area)*2 Open the cover to use it.

1Accessory Power Sockets

 

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts or less (15 amps).

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory power socket.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Canadian models only, if equipped

222

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Wireless Charger*
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

(Power) Button

1. To turn the system on and off, press and

hold the

(power) button.

Green Indicator

u When the system is activated, the green

Amber Indicator

indicator light comes on.

2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area.

u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the amber

indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible

with the system, and placed with the

Charging Area

chargeable side in the center of the

charging area.

 

When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber indicator light will stay on.

1Wireless Charger*

 

CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you.

Always remove foreign objects from the charge pad before charging the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.
Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 223

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator

Cause

Solution

There is an obstacle(s) between

Remove the

the charging area and the

obstacle(s).

Green

Blinking

device.

&

simulta

Move the device to the

Amber

neously

The device is not within the

center of the charging

charging area.

area where

is

located.

Amber

Blinking

The wireless charger is faulty.

Contact a dealer for

repairs.

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

NOTICE

Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can be affected.

“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:

The device is already fully charged.
The temperature of the device is extremely high while charging.
You are at a place that emits strong electromagnetic wave or noises such as TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when:

All the doors and the tailgate are closed
– to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the smart entry system.

The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

FCC statement RF Exposure Notice:
This wireless charger complies with FCC RF exposure guidelines at the distance of 3.94 inches (10 cm).

Keep a distance of at least 3.94 inches (10 cm) between all occupants and the wireless charger when charging.

Don’t remove the wireless charger yourself; contact a dealer for assistance.

Wireless

Wireless Charger

Top view

Charger

All Around

3.94 inches

3.94 inches

(10 cm)

(10 cm)

All Around

3.94 inches (10 cm)

All Around

Side view

3.94 inches

(10 cm)

Wireless

Charger

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

FCC statement

This product complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communication Commission), described below:

This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used per the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

In order to use safely:

Remove any metal objects from the charge pad before charging a device.
Do not open the charger case.
Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact a dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications, attempt to correct the interference:

Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few seconds to turn off the charger.
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 225

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Coat Hook

Controls

Tie-down Anchors

Hooks

 

Hooks

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle. Pull it down to use it.

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.

1Coat Hook

 

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

1Tie-down Anchors

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard.

226

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Cargo Hooks

Hook

The cargo hooks on the driver’s side of the cargo area can be used to hang a light items.

1Cargo Hooks

 

NOTICE

Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs more than 6 lbs (3 kg) on the side cargo hooks. Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the hooks.

 

Controls

Continued 227

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, press and release the indent. To close, press it again until it latches.

 

You can store eyeglasses and other small

Press items in this holder.

Conversation mirror

The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror. Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it back to the first detent.

You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.

1Sunglasses Holder

 

Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.

228

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Heated Steering Wheel*1
The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel.

 

Press the button on the right side of the steering wheel.

When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Heated Steering Wheel*1

 

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

Controls

 

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

Continued 229

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Front Seat Heaters*
The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

Press the seat heater button:

 

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

1Front Seat Heaters*

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heater will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Rear Seat Heaters*1
The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

There is no heater in the rear center seating position.

Press the seat heater button:

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

1Rear Seat Heaters*1

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

Controls

 

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

Continued 231

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Rear Cargo Cover*

1Rear Cargo Cover*

 

Handle

Controls

Mounting Rod

Hook

 

The rear cargo cover can be used to conceal items in the cargo area and protect them from direct sunlight.

To extend:
Slightly lift up on the handle at the center edge of the cover to unhook each end, then pull the cover rearward and clip the mounting rods in the hooks at both sides of the tailgate opening.

To retract:
Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll it back until it is completely retracted.

To remove:
Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard.

Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat in the cargo area. They could block your view and be thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.

To prevent rear cargo cover damage:

Do not place items on the rear cargo cover.
Do not put weight on the rear cargo cover.
Be sure that each mounting rod sets in its respective retention groove when you retract the rear cargo cover. If they are not set in the grooves, the rods may rattle as they contact the surrounding surfaces.

Push either end of the housing inward, then

lift it out of its position.

* Not available on all models
Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

 

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

 

Models without SYNC button Models with SYNC button

Use the system when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO button.
Models without SYNC button

 

Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
Models with SYNC button

 

Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control dial.
Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

Press the CLIMATE button to display A/C, MODE, fan control information on the audio/information screen to operate manually. Select icon to turn on or off A/C, change the vent mode, or change the fan speed.

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that were pressed will be controlled automatically.

During idle-stops, air-conditioning is suspended, and only the blower remains active.

If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel idle-stop.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Controls

 

Continued 233

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls

 

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) or (fresh air) button to switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the (windshield defroster) button

 

turns the air conditioning system on and

automatically switches the system to fresh air

mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the

system returns to the previous settings.

 

1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.

While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.

If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the engine restarts automatically.

234

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.

 

2. Press the button.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

 

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

 

Controls

 

235

Climate Control SystemuSynchronization Mode*
Synchronization Mode*

 

1Synchronization Mode*

 

When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side

temperature and the passenger’s side temperature

can be set separately.

 

Controls

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Dial

Passenger’s

Side

Temperature

Control Dial

SYNC Button

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s side in synchronization mode.

Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronization mode.

Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

* Not available on all models
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

 

The automatic climate control system is

Sensor

equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill

any liquid on them.

 

Sensor

Controls

 

237

238

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

Compass* ……………………………………

454

About Your Audio System…………….

240

USB Port(s)…………………………………

241

Audio System Theft Protection ………

242

Audio Remote Controls………………..

243

Audio System Basic Operation ….

246, 267

Audio Error Messages ………………….

337

General Information on the Audio

System ………………………………………

342

Customized Features …………….

359, 366

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* .. 393

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® …..

396, 420

* Not available on all models 239

Audio System

Features

 

About Your Audio System

 

The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service*. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.

 

iPod

USB Flash Drive

1About Your Audio System

 

SiriusXM® Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio*, contact a dealer.

General Information on the Audio System P. 342
SiriusXM® Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM®* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Remote Controls

* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

USB Port(s)

 

In the console compartment

 

Models with color Models with

audio system Display Audio

Models with

Display Audio

 

On the back of the center console compartment

The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a cellular phone, and charging devices.

Models with Display Audio

 

The USB port (1.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.

u To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.

On the back of the center console compartment*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.

1USB Port(s)

 

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
USB charge

The USB port can supply up to 1.5A/2.5A of power. It does not output 1.5A/2.5A unless requested by the device.

For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

On the back of the center console compartment

These ports are for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to them.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 241

Audio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Audio System Theft Protection

 

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system
Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
Turn on the audio system.
Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize

the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

 

Features

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

242

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls

 

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.

1Audio Remote Controls

 

Some modes appear only when an appropriate

(+ (- Bar

 

ENTER Button 3 Button

Button

Button

4 Button

(Display/Information)

Button

3 4 Buttons

Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio

mode as follows:

Models with color audio system

FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodPandora®

Bluetooth® Audio
Models with Display Audio

FMAMSiriusXM®*USBiPod

Bluetooth® AudioPandora®*Apps*

Audio Apps*

device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

Press the (Hang-up/back) button to go back to the previous command or cancel a command.

Models with Display Audio

Press the (Display/information) button to switch display.

 

Switching the Display P. 268
Models with Display Audio

ENTER Button

When listening to the radio and SiriusXM®*
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to switch the display to a preset list you stored in the preset buttons.
Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then press ENTER.
When listening to a USB flash drive
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the folder list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.
Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in that folder.
Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
Features

* Not available on all models Continued 243

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features

 

When listening to an iPod
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the iPod music list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a category.
Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4 repeatedly until the desired mode you want

to listen to is displayed.

When listening to Pandora®*
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the station list.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
From the audio screen in the driver information interface, press ENTER to display the track list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
– (Volume) Bar
Press +: To increase the volume.

Press -: To decrease the volume.

* Not available on all models
Buttons

When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.

Press : To select the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : To select the next strong station.

Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio* Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

When listening to Pandora®* Press : To skip to the next track.
Press and hold : To select the next station.

Press and hold : To select the previous station.

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

* Not available on all models 245

Audio System Basic Operation

Features

 

Models with color audio system

 

To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY q or ON w.

Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK

(Day/Night) Button

button to access some audio functions.

(Sound) Button

Press

to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll

(Back)

MENU/

through the available choices. Press

to set

Button

CLOCK

your selection.

Button

Selector

Knob

MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any

Menu Display

mode.

The available modes include wallpaper,

display, clock, language setup, and play

modes. Play mode choices include scan,

random, repeat, and so on.

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.

(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.

(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen

brightness.

Press the

button, then adjust the brightness using

.

u Each time you press the

button, the mode switches between the daytime

mode, nighttime mode and off mode.

 

1Audio System Basic Operation

 

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Menu Items

Adjust Clock P. 138
Wallpaper Setup P. 249
Adjusting the Sound P. 251
Display Setup P. 252
Customized Features P. 359
Press the button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.

Audio Remote Controls P. 243
246

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display

Audio/Information Screen

Audio

 

Features

Clock/Wallpaper

Continued 247

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio
Shows the current audio information.

Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

Change display
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio.

 

Features

248

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
.

Rotate to select Import, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list.
Rotate to select a desired picture, then press .
u The selected picture is displayed.

Press to save the picture.
Press to select OK.
Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

 

1Wallpaper Setup

 

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, a message appears.
The wallpaper setup is limited while driving.
Features

 

Continued 249

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Select wallpaper
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Select, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .

To view wallpaper once it is set
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Press the (Back) button until the top screen is displayed.
Delete wallpaper

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

 

1Wallpaper Setup

 

To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

250

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

 

(Sound) Button

 

Selector Knob

 

MID is selectable.

Press the (sound) button, and rotate to scroll through the following choices:

BAS

Bass

 

1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

 

MID

Middle

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive

Volume Compensation

Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then

press .

 

Features

251

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features

 

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press .
Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.

Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.

Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Color Theme, then press .
Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

 

RADIO Button

Press to select a band.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to tune the radio

frequency.

Press, and then turn to select an

item. After that, press again to

make your selection.

Features

 

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to search up and down

the selected band for a station with a strong

signal.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu

items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or cancel a

setting.

To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Continued 253

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features

 

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select the station, then press .

Update List

Updates your available station list at any time.

Press while listening to an FM station.
Rotate to select Update List, then press .

Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press .

 

1Playing AM/FM Radio

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the audio source selecting button on the steering wheel.

Audio Remote Controls P. 243
1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

254

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Port(s) P. 241

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod is connected.

Album Art

MEDIA Button

Press to select iPod

(if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Play Button

Pause Button

Press to resume a

Play Mode Buttons

song.

Press to pause a

song.

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

 

Features

Selector Knob

Turn to change songs.

Press, and then turn to select

an item. After that, press

again to make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu

items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the

previous display or cancel a

setting.

Continued 255

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the iPod music list.

Category

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Selection

 

Item

Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category.

 

Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is displayed.

 

1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 337
256

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode

you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in random order.

Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in random order.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

 

257

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
Features

 

Playing Pandora®

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.

Phone Setup P. 402
USB Port(s) P. 241
MEDIA Button

Press to select Pandora®.

VOL/

(Volume/Power)

Knob

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Press to turn the audio

Turn to change a

system on and off.

station.

Turn to adjust the

Press, and then turn to

volume.

select an item. After

that, press again to

make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

(Skip) Button

Press to display the menu

items.

Press

to skip a track.

Play/Pause Button

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous

Select to resume or play a track.

display or cancel a setting.

Like/Dislike Buttons

Bookmark Button

Select to evaluate a track.

Select to set a track as a bookmark.

 

1Playing Pandora®

 

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.

258

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
How to Create a Station
You can create a station when playing Pandora®.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select New Station, then press .

1How to Create a Station

 

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

Pandora®* P. 339
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

To change stations, press on the main Pandora®

screen, and rotate to select Station List, and then select a new station.

Features

 

Rotate to select an item, then press . u You can select Genre, Current Artist,
or Current Track.

 

* Not available on all models 259

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1 or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Port(s) P. 241

Features

 

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Cover Art

MEDIA Button

Press to select USB flash drive

(if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to change files.

Press, and then turn to select

an item. After that, press again

to make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu

items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

260

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob

 

Folder

 

Selection

Press to display a folder list.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 342
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

 

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 337
Features

Track

Selection

Press to display a list of files in that folder.
Rotate to select a file, then press .

Continued 261

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode

you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat

Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.

Random

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

262

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 402

Bluetooth Indicator

MEDIA Button

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Press to select

Audio/Information Screen

Bluetooth Audio mode

(Back) Button

(if connected)

Press to go back to the previous display.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in Priority Device Setup.

Customized Features P. 359
Features

 

VOL/

(Volume/

Power) Knob

Press to turn

the audio

system on and

off.

Turn to adjust

the volume.

Pause Button (Preset 2)

Press to pause a file.

MENU/

CLOCK

Button

Press to

display the

menu items.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

/

(Seek/Skip)

Buttons

Press

or

to

change

files.

Play Button (Preset 1)

Press to resume a file.

Selector Knob

Turn to change groups.

Press, and then turn to select

an item. After that, press again

to make your selection.

Continued 263

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
MEDIA Button

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to HFL.

2. Press the MEDIA button until the

Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be

Pause Button

connected.

Features

Play Button

■ To pause or resume a file

Press the Play or Pause button to select a mode.

 

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some phones.

If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

264

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the music search list.

Category

Selection

2. Rotate to select a category.

Item

Selection

Press to display a list of items in the category.
Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is displayed.

 

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob

 

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

Features

 

265

Audio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Features

 

Siri® Eyes Free

 

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 402
Using Siri® Eyes Free

(Hang-up/back) Button

Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri® Eyes Free

While in Siri® Eyes Free:

The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

(Talk) Button

Press and hold until the display

changes as shown.

1Siri® Eyes Free

 

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri® Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri® Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

This audio system cannot operate the audio functions by using Siri® Eyes Free.

266

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with Display Audio

 

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

(Home): Select to go to the home screen.

(Home) Icon

2 Switching the Display P. 268

(Map) Icon*

(Map)*: Select to display the map screen.

(Audio) Icon

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

 

1Audio System Basic Operation

 

Audio Menu Items

Station List P. 297, 299
Music Search List P. 308, 317
Scan P. 298, 306, 318
Play Mode P. 309, 318
(Day/Night) Icon

(Back) Icon

(Phone) Icon

 

(Audio): Select to display the audio screen.

 

(Phone): Select to display the phone

 

screen.

(Back): Select to go back to the previous

 

screen when the icon is illuminated.

 

Features

(Day/Night): Select to change the audio/

 

information screen brightness.

Select once and select – or + to make

 

an adjustment.

u Each time you select , the mode

 

switches among the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

* Not available on all models 267

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display
Using the (display/information) button
Press the (display/information) button to change the display.

 

1Using the (display/information) button

 

You can edit, add, and delete the contents shown on the driver information interface.

Customizing the Meter P. 273
(Display/Information) Button

Driver Information

Interface

268

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Using the audio/information screen

1Using the audio/information screen

 

Home Screen

 

Select

to go to the home screen.

 

Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting App List.

Phone
Displays the HFL information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 420
Touchscreen operation

Use simple gestures – including touching, swiping and scrolling – to operate certain audio functions.
Some items may be grayed out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction.
You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or use voice commands.
Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

 

Customized Features P. 366
Features

Continued 269

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Info
Displays Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device Information. Select MENU on the Info Menu screen to see all available options: Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and System/Device Information.

Trip Computer:

Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete history on the History of Trip A

tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.

Voice Info: Displays the All Commands list.

Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper.

System/Device Information:

System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system.
USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.
Audio
Displays the current audio information.

Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 366

Navigation*
Displays the navigation screen.

Refer to the Navigation System Manual
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

HondaLink
Displays the HondaLink® screen.

2 HondaLink® P. 322

Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM
Displays the Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.

Apple CarPlayTM P. 330
Android AutoTM P. 333
App List ( )
Displays the apps or widgets screen.

2 Home Screen P. 279

Instrument Panel
Selects from three customizable settings for the driver information interface.

Features

 

Continued 271

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
Select .
Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

 

Features

272

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Customizing the Meter
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents on the driver information interface.

Settings
System
Configuration of Instrument Panel

1Customizing the Meter

 

You can store up to three customized configurations.

To select or customize a configuration, select Swap

Config..

When you select Swap Config. during customization, the settings you changed will be saved.

When you select during customization, the settings you changed will not be saved and you will be returned to the Instrument Panel screen.

 

Features

Continued 273

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Editing order
To change the order of the icons on the driver information interface, first select:

1. Edit Order

 

Edit Order

2. Select the icon you want to move.

u You will see arrows on both sides of the selected icon.

Select

3. Select the left or right arrow repeatedly to move the icon to your desired position.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Editing order

 

You can use an alternative method to change the order of the icons. First select:

Edit Order
Select and hold the icon you want to move.
Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

Arrow icons OK

274

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Adding contents
You can add icons to the driver information interface. To add icons, first select:

1. Add

 

Add

Select an icon you want to add.
u You will see a plus mark on the upper right hand corner of the selected icon.

Select

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Adding contents

 

Icons that are grayed out cannot be selected.

If an icon has a plus mark in the upper-right corner, it means that the icon has already been added.

Features

 

OK

Continued 275

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Deleting contents
To delete contents on the driver information interface, first select:

1. Delete

 

Delete

Select an icon you want to delete.
u The icon with an X on the upper right hand corner can be deleted.

Select

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Deleting contents

 

You can also delete contents by selecting:

Delete or Edit Order
Select and hold an icon you want to delete.
Drag and drop the icon to the trash icon.
Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

OK

276

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241

Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab.
Select Add New.

u The picture name is displayed on the list.

Select a desired picture.

u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

The wallpaper you set up on Clock/Wallpaper Type cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.
After changing the screen interface design, you can change the wallpaper by following procedure.

Select .
Select .
Select and hold empty space on the home screen. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Change wallpaper.
Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
Features

 

Continued 277

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Select wallpaper
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To view wallpaper once it is set

Select .
Select Info.
Select MENU.
Select Clock/Wallpaper.

Delete wallpaper
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or

select .

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes.

278

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Home Screen
To change to a next screen

Swipe

Icon

Icon

Current page position

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

1Home Screen

 

The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages.

Select to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

Features

 

Continued 279

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To use apps or widgets

App List

( ) Icon

Select .
Select App List ( ).
u The apps screen appears.

Select the app or widget you want to use.

Preinstall app list:

Calculator: Displays Calculator.
Downloads*1: Displays the data downloaded from the web browser and so on.
App Installer: Check with a Honda dealer for apps that are available for installation.
1To use apps or widgets

 

Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 392
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 392
In case those apps still do not start up normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact an authorized Honda dealer.

Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle’s information and your privacy.

You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select Apps.
Select an app that you want to delete.
Select Delete.
Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

*1: Downloads app cannot be used because there is no Browser function in this system.

280

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
Select .

2. Select .

Select and hold empty space on the home
screen.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select and hold.

4. Select Add App or Add Widget.

u The apps/widget screen appears.

Features

 

Continued 281

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Select and hold an app or widget icon you

want to add.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

Drag and drop.

282

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

Drag and drop.

1To move icons on the home screen

 

You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel

icons in the same manner.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 283

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

 

1To remove icons on the home screen

 

You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel

icons.

Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Features

 

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to

trash icon.

Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home screen.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Status Area
Swipe

 

Status Area Bar

Swipe the upper area of the screen. u The status area appears.
Select an item to see the details.
Select or swipe up the bottom bar to close the area.

Features

 

Continued 285

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Changing the Screen Interface
You can change the screen interface design.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Change Skin.
Select Next, then a confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

1Changing the Screen Interface

 

After changing the screen interface design, you can change the wallpaper by following procedure.

Select .
Select .
Select and hold empty space on the home screen. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Change wallpaper.
Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
If you change the screen interface, some of the setting items will change.

Customized Features P. 366
286

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Menu Customize
You can change menu icons on the right side of Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

1.

Select any of the three icons (Audio/

Menu Icons

Phone/Info) on the screen, then select and

hold the menu icon.

u Selecting the or icon, you can

change Audio, Phone, or Info on the

Select and hold

2.

Menu Customize screen.

To change

Menu Icon

Select and hold the menu icon you want to

change, then drag and drop the icon to the

bottom.

Drag and drop

To add

3.

Select and hold the menu icon you want to

add, then drag and drop the icon above.

 

Select OK.
Drag and drop

1Menu Customize

 

You can also use the method below to change the menu icon:

Select SettingsSystemHome tab Menu Icon Position

Features

 

Continued 287

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Closing Apps
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.

Select and hold .
Select the Active tab.
u If you select the Active/History tab, you can close the apps that are currently running and delete the app activity history simultaneously.

Select an app you want to close.
Select Clear.
u The display will return to the app list.

 

1Closing Apps

 

If you have a number of apps running in the background and something goes wrong with the audio system, some of those apps may not work properly. If this happens, close all the apps and re-launch the app/apps that you want to use.

To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then Yes.

You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin* apps.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

 

Select .
Select MENU.
Select Sound.

Select a tab from the following choices:

 

BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble
FAD-BAL-SUBW*: Fader, Balance, Subwoofer*
SVC: Speed Volume Compensation
1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 289

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features

 

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Display tab.
Select Display Settings.
Select the setting you want.
Select OK.
Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Display tab.
Select Background Color.
Select Next, then select the setting you want.
Select OK.

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

290

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Selecting an Audio Source

Select the source icon.

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

1Selecting an Audio Source

 

If you start up preinstalled audio apps, is displayed on the screen.

These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the source select screen.

You can start up those audio apps from .

Features

 

291

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

Voice Control Operation

 

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.

The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:

Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using.
The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands.

2 Voice Portal Screen P. 293

Close the windows and moonroof*.
Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling.
Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
1Voice Control Operation

 

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Portal Screen

When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.

You can see the list of commands in Voice Info on the Info Menu screen. Select Info, then select MENU.

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

Phone Call
This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for phone commands.

Dial by number
Call history
Redial
Call <Your Contact Name>
Call <Phone Number>
Call Police
Call 911
Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlayTM.

Music Search
This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected.

Climate Control*1
When the system recognizes the Climate Control command, the screen will change the dedicated screen to the climate control voice recognition screen.

Climate Control Commands*1 P. 295
Audio*1
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen.

Audio On/Off
Radio FM/AM/SXM*
PANDORA*
iPod
USB
Other Sources
Pandora®* cannot be used while Android AutoTM is active.

Navigation*1
The screen changes to the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink
This can be only used when the phone is connected.

Voice Setting
The screen changes to the Voice Recog.

tab on the System Settings screen.

Features

 

*1: Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models Continued 293

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

Voice Help
You can see a list of the available commands on the screen.

Useful Commands
Phone Commands
Audio Commands
Climate Control Commands
General Commands
Music Search Commands
On Screen Commands
Useful Commands
The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen.

Call <Phone Number>
Call <Your contact Name>
What time is it?
What is today’s date?
*1: Models with navigation system

Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Call by number
Call by name
Call <Phone Number>
Call <Your contact Name>
Audio Commands*1
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.

Radio FM Commands
Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM

Radio FM preset # (#:1-12)
Radio AM Commands
Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
Radio AM preset # (#:1-6)
Radio SXM Commands*
SXM channel <1-999>
SXM channel <channel name, category name, traffic and weather city name, sports team name>
Radio SXM preset <1-12>
Pandora® Commands*
• PANDORA play

iPod Commands
iPod play
iPod play track # (#:1-30)
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?
USB Commands
• USB play

• USB play track # (#:1-30)

• Music Search

• What album is this?

• What am I listening to?

Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Bluetooth audio play

NOTE:

Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio devices.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

On Screen Commands
When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed.

Music Search Commands
The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.

Using Song By Voice
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must press the (Talk) button and say: “Music search”.

Song By Voice Commands
• What am I listening to?

• Who am I listening to?

• Who is this?

• What’s playing?

• Who’s playing?

• What album is this?

Play Commands
Play artist <Name>
Play track/song <Name>
Play album <Name>
Play genre/category <Name>
Play playlist <Name>
Play composer <Name>
List Commands
List artist <Name>
List album <Name>
List genre/category <Name>
List playlist <Name>
List composer <Name>
General Commands
What time is it?
What is today’s date?
Climate Control Commands*1

Climate Control On
Climate Control Off
Fan Speed <1-7>
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Temperature <57-87> degrees (U.S.)
Temperature <18-32> degrees (Canada)
Defrost On
Defrost Off
Air conditioner On
Air conditioner Off
More
Vent
Dash and floor
Floor vents
Floor and Defrost
Climate Control Automatic
Fan Speed up/down
Temperature up
Temperature down
NOTE:

These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.

Features

 

*1: Models with navigation system

295

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

 

Features

 

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a

strong signal.

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)

Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Tune Icons

Preset Icons

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Seek Icons

Select or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

Select

or

to tune

Tune the preset radio frequency. Select and hold the

the radio

frequency.

preset icon to store that station. Select

to display

preset 7 onwards.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

296

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Preset Memory
To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.

Tune to the selected station.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.

Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Station List tab.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Station List tab.
Select Refresh.
1Preset Memory

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select SOURCE on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 243
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory.

Models with HD RadioTM

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Features

 

Continued 297

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features

 

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or .

 

Models with HD RadioTM

 

HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station.

Select MENU.
Select HD Radio Subchannel.
Select the channel number.
298

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the Station List tab.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the Station List tab.
Select Refresh.
Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Select MENU.
Select View Radio Text.
1Radio Data System (RDS)

 

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

 

299

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

Features

 

Driver Information Interface

Category Icons

Select or to display and select a

SiriusXM® Radio category.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each channel.

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

Skip Icons

Select or to change section in the channel. Select and hold to move rapidly within the section.

Channel Icons

Select or to the previous or next channel.

Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Audio/Information Screen

Station Art

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Preset Icons

Tune the preset radio station. Select and hold the preset icon to store that

station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
To Change the Tune Mode
Select MENU.
Select Tune Mode.
Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does

not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).

This does not indicate a problem with your audio

system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,

which can take about a minute. Once they have

loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make

your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select SOURCE on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 243
Tune Start:

When you change to a preset channel, a song being

played on that channel restarts from the beginning

with this function. This can be turned on or off from

the Audio Settings screen.

Customized Features P. 366
Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 301

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Preset Memory
To store a channel:

Tune to the selected channel.
Press and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Select OK.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.

Tune to the selected channel.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to five of your preferred music channels in total.

Tune a station.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel.

u A message appears if there are no available presets.

Select Combine.
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

To store a multi-channel preset, you need to setup the Multiple Channel Mix Preset setting to On.

Customized Features P. 366
* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.

Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
Select the Channel tab.
Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
Select the channel.
1Listening to Featured Channels

 

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.

Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

 

Features

Continued 303

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Select MENU.
Select Playback.
Move the time marker to the position you want to replay.
The following items are available on the pop-up screen:

(Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection.

(Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection.

 

(15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection.

 

(15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection.

 

u Select OK to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues.

To play or pause on playback mode:

Select MENU.
Select Play/Pause.
Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select MENU.

2. Select Go to Live.

1Replay Function

 

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

Audio/Information Screen

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment

(C): Length stored in memory

304

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from the games of your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Favorite Team.
Select a team.

To set up an alert message
1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Audio.

4. Select SportsFlash Setup.

5. Select Interrupt.

6. Select On(One Time) or On(Continue).

 

1Live Sports Alert

 

The sports alert function is available in SiriusXM® mode only.

1To set up a favorite team

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. Selecting On(One Time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.

Customized Features P. 366
You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Features

 

Continued 305

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

To set up an alert beep
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Interrupt Beep.
Select On.
Traffic and Weather Information

You can receive traffic and weather information.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered.

 

Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.

Select Scan.
Select Scan Channels.
u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Song in Preset.

To turn off scan, select Cancel.

1To set up an alert beep

 

You can also set up an alert beep by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
1Traffic and Weather Information

The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM® mode only.

You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
1Scan

The “Scan Songs in Preset” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.

The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

306

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.

USB Port(s) P. 241

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Driver Information Interface

 

Features

Audio/Information Screen

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed

information.

Song Icons

Play/Pause Icon

Select

or

to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

Cover Art

within a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Continued 307

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Select MENU and select Music Search.

Category

Selection

Select the items on that menu.
1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 337
If you operate any music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlayTM, the iPod/USB source is unavailable and audio files on the phone can only be played within Apple CarPlayTM.

Item Selection

308

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

Select a play mode.

 

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order.

Repeat: Repeats the current track.

Features

 

309

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features

 

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

 

Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands.

To enable SBV

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Song by Voice.
Select Next, then select On or Off.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

 

Setting options:

On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands are available.
Off: Disable the feature.
310

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Searching for music using SBV
Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
Press the (Talk) button and say “Music Search” to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod.
Then, say a next command.

u Example 1: Say “(List)‘Artist A’” to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.

u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’” to start

playing songs by that artist.

To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/ back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.

Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say “Music Search” again to re-activate this mode.

1Searching for music using SBV

 

Song By VoiceTM Commands List

Song By Voice Commands P. 295
NOTE:

Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.

You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.

Phonetic Modification P. 312
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlayTM. Use Siri® Eyes Free instead.

Features

 

Continued 311

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features

 

Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Song by Voice Phonetic Modification.
Select New Modification.

1Phonetic Modification

 

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.

Select USB or iPod.
312

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.

Select an entry to modify.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

u To listen to the current phonetic

modification, select Play.

u To delete the current phonetic

modification, select Delete.

10.Select Modify.

11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to

use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.

12.Select Done.

u The artist “No Name” is phonetically

modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV

mode, you can press the (Talk) button

and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist

A’” to play songs by the artist “No

Name.”

Features

 

313

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®*
Playing Pandora®*

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.

Phone Setup P. 428
USB Port(s) P. 241

1Playing Pandora®*

 

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

Features

 

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

Driver Information Interface

Cover Art

Audio/Information

Screen

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power

Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Station Up/

Down Icons

Select to change a station.

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a track.

Play/Pause Icon

Select to resume or play a track.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a track.

system is selected.

If your phone is connected to Android AutoTM, Pandora® is only available through the Android AutoTM interface. Visit the Android AutoTM website to check compatibility.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®*

Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio system. The available items are:

Bookmark
Station List
New Station
Switch USB device
Sound
Setting
Operating a menu item
Select MENU.
Select an item.

1Pandora® Menu

 

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

Pandora®* P. 339
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 315

 

Features

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Port(s) P. 241

Driver Information Interface

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous

display.

(Audio) Icon

Select to display the audio screen.

Audio/Information Screen

VOL/

AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)

Open/Close Icon*2

Knob

Displays/hides the detailed

Press to turn the audio system on and

information.

off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Icons

Folder Icons

Select

or

to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within

Select

to skip to the next folder, and

to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

a track.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

316

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Select MENU and select Music Search.

Folder Selection

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 342
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

 

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 337
2. Select a folder.

Track Selection

3. Select a track.

Features

Continued 317

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

■ Scan

 

1. Select MENU.

2. Select Scan.

3. Select a play mode.

■ Random/Repeat

 

Select a play mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

To turn off a play mode
To turn off Scan, select or Cancel.

 

To turn off Random or Repeat, select the mode you want to turn off.

318

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 428
Driver Information

Audio/

Interface

Information

Screen

(Back) Icon

Bluetooth

Indicator

Select to go back to the

Appears when

previous display.

your phone is

(Audio) Icon

connected to

Select to display

HFL.

the audio screen.

Open/Close

VOL/

AUDIO

Icon*1

(Volume/Power

Displays/hides

Audio) Knob

the detailed

Press to turn the

information.

audio system on

Track Icons

and off.

Select

or

to change tracks.

Turn to adjust the

Group Icons

volume.

Select

or

to change group.

Play Icon

Pause

Icon

 

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in Priority Device Settings.

Customized Features P. 366
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

Features

 

Continued 319

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlayTM

or Android AutoTM, Bluetooth® Audio from that

phone is unavailable. However, a second previously

paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by

selecting Connect from the Bluetooth Device

List screen.

2 Phone Setup P. 428

 

Features

320

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 428

 

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon.
Searching for Music
Select MENU.
Select Music Search.
Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
Select an item.

u The selection begins playing.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth® settings on the Audio Menu screen by the following procedure.

Select MENU.
Select Setting.
1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Features

 

321

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

HondaLink®

 

HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 327
Phone Setup P. 428
HondaLink® Menu

Places*
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealers, etc. and provides navigation instructions to those locations via the navigation system.

Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

Help & Support
Displays tips on vehicle usage and provides information on roadside assistance and the customer service center.

1HondaLink®

The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HondaLink® can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

 

* Not available on all models
Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

Weather*
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time.

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to the HondaLink® service.

To enable the HondaLink® service
Select .

2. Select Settings.

Select Info.
Select the HondaLink tab.
Select Diagnostics & Location Data.
Select On.
To complete the procedure, you must consent to the collection and transmission of data pertaining to your vehicle.

 

Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt shows again next time.)

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

* Not available on all models Continued

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

323

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
To link with HondaLink®
You can see this screen after launching

 

HondaLink®.

 

Features

324

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Using the shortcut operation, you can quickly gain access to new messages.

In the header area, a message appears to

notify you of a new message.

u When the message is received, a notification ring can be heard.

Message Icon

2. The notification message is replaced by an icon which remains displayed until the new message is read.

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

Continued 325

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages.

Select a new message to open.
u If you have selected the update option for HondaLink®, follow the directions on the screen to complete the process.

1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

 

When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the engine running and maintain a constant connection with HondaLink®.

If the update is interrupted, the system will automatically resume the process. If, however, a week has elapsed since the process was first interrupted, you must repeat the process from the beginning.

You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.

326

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection

 

You can connect the Display Audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.

Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.
Select the Wi-Fi tab.
Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, select Next, then On.
Select Yes.
Select Wi-Fi Device List.

u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is

in access point (tethering) mode.

u Select the phone you want to connect to

the system.

u If you do not find the phone you want to

connect in the list, select Scan.

Select Add.

u If needed, enter a password for your phone and select Done.

u When the connection is successful, the

icon is displayed on the top of the screen.

 

9. Select to go back to the home screen.

 

1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

 

You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the icon on the Wi-Fi Device List screen. Network speed will not be displayed on this screen.

Features

 

Continued 327

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

 

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)

 

iPhone users

You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi connection again after you boot your phone.

Features

328

Audio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Siri® Eyes Free

 

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 428
Using Siri® Eyes Free

(Hang-up/back) Button

Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri® Eyes Free

While in Siri® Eyes Free:

The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

(Talk) Button

Press and hold until the display

changes as shown.

1Siri® Eyes Free

 

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri® Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri® Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

Features

 

329

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM
Apple CarPlayTM

 

If you connect an Apple CarPlayTM-compatible iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

USB Port(s) P. 241
Apple CarPlayTM Menu

Home screen Apple CarPlayTM menu screen

 

1Apple CarPlayTM

 

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlayTM and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Apple CarPlayTM, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port located on the back of the center console compartment will not enable Apple CarPlayTM operation.

USB Port(s) P. 241
Features

: Go back to the home screen

Apple CarPlayTM icon

Go back to the Apple CarPlayTM Dashboard screen
Go back to the Apple CarPlayTM menu screen
To directly access the Apple CarPlayTM phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlayTM, calls are only made through Apple CarPlayTM. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlayTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.

Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM P. 331
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlayTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlayTM is connected.

Phone Setup P. 428
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlayTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

330

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlayTM) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlayTM. Use of Apple CarPlayTM will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlayTM experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the Display Audio Screen.

Enabling Apple CarPlayTM
Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Apple CarPlayTM

 

Apple CarPlayTM Operating Requirements & Limitations

Apple CarPlayTM requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlayTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlayTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlayTM performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM

You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlayTM:

Select HOMESettingsSmartphone Apple CarPlay

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlayTM is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy.

Features

 

Continued 331

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM
Features

 

Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri®.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press and hold to activate Siri®.

Press again to deactivate Siri®.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

1Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®

 

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri®.

What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.

332

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Android AutoTM

 

When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via the 1.5A USB port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated. When connected via Android AutoTM, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android AutoTM, a tutorial will appear on the screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android AutoTM.

USB Port(s) P. 241
Auto Pairing Connection P. 335
1Android AutoTM

 

To use Android AutoTM, you need to download the Android AutoTM app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android AutoTM.

Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android AutoTM and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Android AutoTM, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port on the back of the center console compartment will not enable Android AutoTM operation.

USB Port(s) P. 241
When your Android phone is connected to Android AutoTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android AutoTM is connected.

Phone Setup P. 428
Features

 

Continued 333

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
Features

 

Android AutoTM Menu

6

: Go back to the home screen

Android AutoTM icon

a Maps (Navigation)

Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android AutoTM) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by turn driving directions to your destination.

b Phone (Communication)

Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

c Google Now (Home screen)

Display useful information organized by Android AutoTM into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed.

1Android AutoTM

 

For details on countries and regions where Android AutoTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android AutoTM homepage. Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android AutoTM Operating Requirements & Limitations

Android AutoTM requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android AutoTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android AutoTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android AutoTM performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android AutoTM. Refer to the Android AutoTM homepage for information on compatible apps.

334

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
d Music and audio

Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android AutoTM.

To switch between music apps, press this icon.

e Go back to the Home Screen.

Voice
Operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the 1.5A USB port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated.

Enabling Android AutoTM
Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Enabling Android AutoTM

 

Only initialize Android AutoTM when you are safely parked. When Android AutoTM first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android AutoTM settings after you have completed the initial setup:

Select HOMESettingsSmartphone Android Auto

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android AutoTM is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

Features

 

Continued 335

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM
Features

 

Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press and hold to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

(Hang-up/back) Button:

Press to deactivate voice recognition.

1Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition

 

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:

Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

336

Audio Error Messages

iPod/USB Flash Drive

 

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

USB Error*1, *2

Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is

compatible with the audio system.

The connected USB device has a problem.

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn

the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

See Owner’s Manual*2

error.

Unsupported Ver*1

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod

Unsupported Version*2

is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry*1, *2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported

format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.

iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.

No Song*1

USB flash drive

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV*1

No Data*2

files in the USB flash drive.

iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

Features

 

Continued 337

Audio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Error Message

Solution

Device No Response*1

Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears

when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

HUB Unsupported*1

Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the

HUB.

*1:Models with color audio system

 

Features

338

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®*

Pandora®*

 

If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Models with color audio system

 

Error Message

Solution

No Device Connected

Appears when no device is connected.

Check the Bluetooth® and USB connection.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot

the app and reconnect the device.

To begin listening, select a station from the stations list.

Appears when any station is not selected. Select a station from the

station list on the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®

to the latest version.

No station list on device.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to

Use device to create station.

create a station.

PANDORA system maintenance.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.

Unable to play PANDORA. When stopped, log-in to

Appears you do not log in to Pandora®. Log in to Pandora®.

PANDORA.

No network connectivity.

Appears when the network is deteriorated. Move the vehicle and

check the reception of the signal.

Appears when the sending the data is failed for ten times and the

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

device may have a malfunction. Try again later. Move the vehicle and

check the reception of the signal.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 339

Audio Error MessagesuPandora®*
Features

 

Error Message

Solution

Unable to play PANDORA. Music licensing restricts play in

Appears when the vehicle is in the restricted area to listen the music.

this area.

Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. In order to have

Please check owners manual

any problems on a connected device, there is a possibility that the

audio system cannot be recognized the device. Contact a dealer.

Models with Display Audio

Error Message

Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device

to create a station.

Unable to rate track. Please try again.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the

predetermined number of times in an hour.

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

Appears when the commanded operation fails. Try again later.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot

the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA App version is not supported.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®

to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again

later.

340

Audio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Error Message

Solution

Unable to connect to PANDORA. When stopped, check your

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.

Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install

mobile phone

Pandora® app to your device.

Models with Display Audio

 

Android/Apps

 

If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message*1

Solution

Unfortunately, **** has

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.

stopped.

App is not responding.

**** is not responding.

Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep

waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data

Would you like to close it?

Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 392

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

Features

 

341

General Information on the Audio System

Features

 

SiriusXM® Radio Service*

 

Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the screen, select Channel to 0.
Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the ENTER button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Requested Channel Not Subscribed:

You are not subscribed to the channel selected.

Subscription Updated:

SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

Channel Not Available:

No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.

No Signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Check Tuner:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.

Check Antenna:

The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio

 

Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:

U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:

In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle.
In tunnels
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Large items carried on the roof rack
342

* Not available on all models

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Models with color audio system

Model

iPod (5th generation)

iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)

iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)

iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012

iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/ iPhone 6 Plus

Models with Display Audio

 

Model

iPod touch (6th generation) released 2015

iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/ iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/ iPhone XR

USB Flash Drives
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV* formats may be unsupported.
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

 

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 343

 

Features

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
344

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
Features

 

Continued 345

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations;
violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
346

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation

HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
Features

 

Continued 347

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
348

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
Features

 

Continued 349

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

E. Information Collection and Storage

Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
350

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.

Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
Features

 

Continued 351

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

352

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
Features

 

Continued 353

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.

YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

354

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.

This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

Features

 

355

 

Features

General Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM
Models with Display Audio

 

Legal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

 

OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

356

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

Features

 

357

General Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
Features

 

About Open Source Licenses

 

To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select License, then press .

Models with Display Audio

 

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select About device.
Select Legal information.
Select Open source licenses.

1About Open Source Licenses

 

Models with color audio system

LICENSE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

358

Customized Features

Models with color audio system

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON w, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup.

 

Audio/Information Screen

(Phone) Button

MENU/CLOCK Button

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Shift to (P.
1How to customize

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select. Press to enter.

 

Features

Selector Knob

Continued 359

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

 

Adjust Clock

Settings

RDS Settings

RDS Information

Radio Text

Add New Device

Bluetooth Setup

Connect an Audio Device

Brightness

Display Adjustment

Contrast

Black Level

Camera Guideline

Rear Camera

 

360

Customized Featuresu

Display Change

Audio

Wallpaper

Select

Wallpaper

Import

Delete

Blue

Color Theme

Red

Amber

Violet

Bluegreen

Language

12h

Clock Format

24h

 

License

 

Features

 

Continued 361

 

Features

Customized Featuresu
Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

 

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Priority Device Setup

Connect a Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Disconnect All Devices

Delete Device

Pass-Key

Speed Dial

Ringtone

Mobile Phone

Fixed

Caller ID Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

Auto Transfer

System Clear

 

362

uuCustomized Featuresu

List of customizable options
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Adjust Clock

Adjust Clock.

2 Clock P. 138

RDS Information

Selects whether the RDS information comes

On*1/Off

RDS

on.

Settings

Radio Text

Displays the radio text information of the

selected RDS station.

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

Add New Device

paired phone, and create a code for a paired

Bluetooth

phone.

Setup

2 Phone Setup P. 402

Settings

Connect an Audio

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Device

Audio device to HFL.

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/

information screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/

Adjustment

information screen.

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/

information screen.

Rear

Camera Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines come on the

On*1/Off

Camera

audio/information screen.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 363

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Display Change

Changes the display type.

Audio*1/Wallpaper

Select

Changes the wallpaper type.

Clock*1/Image 1/Image 2/

Image 3

Wallpaper

Import

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 249

Settings

Delete

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Image 1/Image 2/Image 3

Color Theme

Changes the background color of the audio/

Blue*1/Red/Amber/Violet/

information screen.

Bluegreen

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/Spanish

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to

12h*1/24h

24H.

License

Shows the legal information.

*1:Default Setting

364

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Add New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 402

Enables the system to or disables it from automatically

Priority

establishing a connection with a Bluetooth® device

On*1/Off

Priority

which has been assigned priority.

Device

Phone Priority

Selects the priority device over another

Bluetooth

Setup

pairedphone(s).

Audio Priority

Selects the priority device over another paired audio

Setup

device(s).

Connect a Phone

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone to HFL.

Features

2 Phone Setup P. 402

Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

Setup

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Delete Device

Deletes a paired phone.

Pass-Key

Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.

Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 411

Ringtone

Selects the ring tone.

Mobile Phone*1/Fixed

Caller ID Info

Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number as the

Name Priority*1/

caller ID.

Number Priority

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone to

On*1/Off

HFL when you enter the vehicle.

System Clear

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone

Setup group as default.

*1:Default Setting

365

Customized Features

Models with Display Audio

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize

While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, select , and Settings, then select a setting item.

 

Features

Audio/Information Screen

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Shift to (P.
366

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customization flow
Select Settings.

 

Clock

 

Info

 

Clock

 

HondaLink

 

Others

 

Default

 

Clock

 

HondaLink

 

Others

 

Default

 

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2

 

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

 

Manual Time Zone*

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Diagnostic & Location Data

 

Info Screen Preference

 

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2

 

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

 

Manual Time Zone*

 

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Diagnostic & Location Data

 

Info Screen Preference

 

Clock

 

Wallpaper

 

Clock

 

Wallpaper

 

Features

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models Continued 367

Customized Featuresu

Features

Camera

 

Bluetooth / Wi-Fi

 

Rear Camera

 

LaneWatch*

 

Cross Traffic

 

Monitor*

Bluetooth

Wi-Fi

Default

Fixed Guideline

 

Dynamic Guideline

 

Default

 

Show with Turn Signal

 

Display Time after Turn Signal Off

 

Reference Line

 

Default

 

Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Device List Priority Device Settings Edit Pairing Code

 

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Wi-Fi Device List

Wi-Fi Information

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu

Phone

 

Audio

 

Phone

 

Text/Email

 

Default

 

FM/AM

 

SXM*

 

Bluetooth

 

Other

 

Default

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Edit Speed Dial

 

Ring Tone

 

Automatic Phone Sync

 

HondaLink Assist

 

Enable Text/Email

 

Select Account

 

New Message Notification

 

HD Radio Mode (FM)*

 

HD Radio Mode (AM)*

RDS INFO

TuneStart

 

SportsFlash Setup

 

Traffic & Weather Setup

 

Multiple Channel Mix Preset

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Cover Art

 

Audio Source Pop-Up

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 369

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

System

 

Home

 

Display

Sound/Beep

 

Home Screen Edit Order Menu Icon Position*2 Configuration of Instrument Panel Tachometer Setting

 

Display Settings

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Background Color*1

Blue

Amber

Red

Violet

BlueGreen

 

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Guidance Volume

 

Text Message Volume

Voice Recog. Volume

Meter Volume – List Reading

Meter Volume – Alphabetic Reading

Verbal Reminder

Beep Volume

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

370

Customized Featuresu

Voice Recog.

Clock

 

One Press Voice Operation

 

Voice Prompt

Voice Recog. Volume

Song by Voice

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification Phonebook Phonetic Modification Automatic Phone Sync

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/

Clock

Clock Type*2

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

Manual Time Zone*

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

 

Features

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models Continued 371

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Others

 

Default

 

Language

 

Voice Command Tips

 

Remember Last Screen*1

 

Memory Refresh

 

Refresh Time Adjustment

 

Change Skin

 

Factory Data Reset

 

Climate Screen Timeout

 

Detail Information

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

372

Customized Featuresu

Vehicle

 

TPMS Calibration

Cancel

Calibrate

Driver Assist System Setup

Forward Collision Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Blind Spot Info

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Driver Attention Monitor

Meter Setup

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Alarm Volume

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Auto Idle Stop Display

Turn By Turn Auto Display*

New Message Notifications

Speed/Distance Units

Tachometer

Driving Position Setup*

Memory Position Link

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 373

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Smartphone

 

Keyless Access Setup

 

Lighting Setup

Door/Window Setup

Power Tailgate Setup*

Maintenance Info.

Default

Apple CarPlay

 

Android Auto

Remote Start System On/Off Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer Auto Light Sensitivity*

 

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

 

Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key and Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer Walk Away Auto Lock

 

Hands-free Access Mode* Keyless Open Mode Power Open By Outer Handle

 

* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu

List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock/

Clock

Wallpaper

Type*1/Clock

Wallpaper

Type*2

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

Clock

Manual Time Zone*

Auto Daylight Saving Time

See Info on P. 376

Clock

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

HondaLink

Diagnostic & Location Data

Others

Info Screen Preference

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Clock settings group as default.

*1:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 375

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

376

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/

Clock

Changes the clock display type.

Analog/Digital*1/

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

Type*2/

Changes the wallpaper type.

Blank/Galaxy*1/

Clock

Wallpaper

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

Type*3

Metallic/Time Zone

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Clock Adjustment

Adjusts Clock.

Auto Time Zone*

Automatically adjusts the clock when driving

On*1/Off

through different time zones.

Info

Clock

Manual Time Zone*

Changes the time zone manually.

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust

Auto Daylight Saving Time

the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to

On*1/Off

cancel this function.

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

Upper Right*1/Upper

Overlay Clock Location

Changes the clock display layout.

Left/Lower Right/

Lower Left/Off

Clock Reset

Resets the clock settings to the factory default.

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

HondaLink

Diagnostic &

Turns HondaLink® on and off.

On*1/Off

Location Data

Selects the top menu when the

(display/

Info Screen

information) button is pressed.

Info Top/Info

Info

Others

Info Top- A brief menu pops up.

Preference

Menu*1/Off

Info Menu- A full menu pops up.

Off- A menu does not pop up.

 

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info settings

group as default.

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear

camera monitor.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 558

 

Yes/No

On*1/Off

Features

Rear Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the movement

Camera Dynamic Guideline of the steering wheel. On*1/Off

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 558
Camera

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera

Default

Yes/No

setting group as default.

Show with Turn

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when

On*1/Off

Signal

you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn.

LaneWatch*

Display Time after

Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays

0 second*1/2 seconds

Turn Signal Off

on after the turn signal lever returns to the center.

*1:Default Setting

 

* Not available on all models Continued 377

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable

Group

Settings

Reference Line

Selects whether the reference lines come on the

On*1/Off

LaneWatch monitor.

LaneWatch*

Camera

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

LaneWatch group as default.

Cross Traffic Monitor*

Turns on and off the cross traffic monitor.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Changes the Bluetooth® status.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired

phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 428

Priority On/Off

Enables the system to or disables it from automatically

establishing a connection with a Bluetooth® device

On*1/Off

Bluetooth

Status

Bluetooth

which has been assigned priority.

Priority

/ Wi-Fi

Device

Audio

Selects the priority device over another paired

Settings

audio device(s).

Phone

Selects the priority device over another

pairedphone(s).

Edit Pairing Code

Edits a pairing code.

Random/Fixed*1

2 To change the pairing code setting P. 429

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

On/Off*1

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Device List

Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

device.

/ Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Information

Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Bluetooth / Wi-Fi group as default.

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

Bluetooth Device List

Features

disconnects a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 428

Edit Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 434

Phone

Phone

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile

Phone*1

Sets a phonebook and call history data to be

Automatic Phone Sync

automatically imported when a phone is paired

On*1/Off

to HFL.

HondaLink Assist

Turns HondaLink Assist on and off.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

Continued 379

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and

On*1/Off

off.

Text/Email

Select Account

Selects a text or e-mail message account.

Phone

New Message Notification

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

On/Off*1

screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail

message.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Phone settings group as default.

HD Radio Mode (FM)*

Selects whether the audio system

automatically switches to the digital radio

Auto*1/Analog only

Audio

FM/AM mode

HD Radio Mode (AM)*

waves or receives the analog waves only.

FM/AM

RDS INFO

Turns on and off the RDS information.

On*1/Off

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

TuneStart

Turns on and off, starts the song from the

On*1/Off

beginning as you change preset stations.

Interrupt

Turns on and off the sports alert function.

Off*1/On(One Time)/

On(Continue)

SportsFlash

Favorite

Selects your favorite sports teams.

SiriusXM® mode

Setup

Team

2 Live Sports Alert P. 305

Audio

SXM*

Interrupt

Causes the system to beep when the sports

On*1/Off

Beep

alert is notified.

Traffic & Weather Setup

Selects the region you want to receive the

information.

Multiple Channel Mix

Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

On*1/Off

Preset

 

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 381

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bluetooth® mode

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone.

Bluetooth

2 Phone Setup P. 428

iPod or USB mode

[Your selected media]

Turns the cover art display on and off.

On*1/Off

Audio

Other

Cover Art

Selects whether the list of selectable audio source

Audio Source Pop-Up

comes on when Audio is selected on the home

On/Off*1

screen.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Yes/No

settings group as default.

Home Screen Edit Order

Changes the home screen icon layout.

Menu Icon Position*2

Changes the position of the menu icons on the

Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

System

Home

Configuration of

Changes the Instrument Panel screen icon

Instrument Panel

layout.

Tachometer Setting

Turns on and off the tachometer display.

On*1/Off

 

*1:Default Setting

*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

382

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information

Settings

screen.

Display

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen.

System

Background Color*2

Changes the background color of the audio/

Blue/Amber/Red/

information screen.

Violet/BlueGreen*1

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Changes the sound volume.

Sound/

Guidance Volume

Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation

1~6*1~11

system.

Beep

Text Message Volume

Changes the text/e-mail message reading

1~6*1~11

volume.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

Continued 383

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Meter Volume – List

Changes the list reading volume.

1~6*1~11

Reading

Sound/

Meter Volume –

1~6*1~11

Beep

Changes the alphabetic reading volume.

Alphabetic Reading

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Beep Volume

Changes the beep volume.

Off/1/2*1/3

One Press Voice

Changes the setting of the

(Talk) button operation when

On*1/Off

System

Operation

using the voice operation.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Voice

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

On*1/Off

Recog. Song by Voice

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or

Phonetic Modification

an iPod/iPhone.

2 Phonetic Modification P. 312

Phonebook Phonetic

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Modification

2 Phonetic Modification P. 312

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically

On/Off

imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

 

*1:Default Setting

384

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/Wallpaper

Clock

Type*2/Clock

Wallpaper

Type*3

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

Clock

Manual Time Zone*

See Info on P. 376

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Clock Format

System

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

English (United

Language

Change the display language.

States)*1/Français/

Others

Español

Alerts you when manual control of the system is

Voice Command Tips

disabled to prevent distraction while driving.

On*1/Off

Only voice commands are available.

Features

 

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models Continued 385

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Remember Last Screen*2

Selects whether the device remembers the last

On/Off*1

screen.

Turns on the audio system automatically and restores

Memory Refresh

the fragmentation of a memory when the power

On*1/Off

mode is VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Refresh Time Adjustment

Sets the time for Memory Refresh.

Others

Change Skin

Changes the screen interface design.

Yes/No

System

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

Yes/No

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 392

Changes the length of time the climate control

Never/5 Seconds/10

Climate Screen Timeout

display stays on when you press the CLIMATE

Seconds*1/20

button.

Seconds

Detail Information

Displays the details of the head unit and operating

system information.

Default

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the System

Yes/No

group as default.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

386

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

TPMS Calibration

Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system

Cancel*1/Calibrate

(TPMS).

Forward Collision

Changes CMBSTM alert distance.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with

On/Off*1

Detect Beep

Low Speed Follow range.

Vehicle

Driver

Blind Spot Info

Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and Visual

Assist

Alert*1/Visual Alert/Off

System

Lane Keeping Assist

Setup

Causes the system to beep when LKAS is suspended.

On/Off*1

Suspend Beep

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/

Mitigation Setting

system.

Warning Only

Driver Attention

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile And Audible

Monitor

Alert*1/Tactile Alert/OFF

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 387

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

388

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Adjust Outside Temp.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

(U.S.)

Display

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A

When Refueled/IGN Off/

and average fuel economy A.

Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B

When Refueled/IGN Off/

and average fuel economy B.

Manually Reset*1

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Meter

Vehicle

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Setup

Auto Idle Stop Display

Selects whether the Auto Idle Stop display comes

On/Off*1

on.

Turn By Turn Auto

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on

On*1/Off

Display*

during the route guidance.

New Message

Used to select whether a pop-up alert comes on the

On*1/Off

Notifications

screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.

mph · miles*1/km/h · km

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

(U.S.)

km/h · km*1/mph · miles

(Canada)

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Meter

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver

On*1/Off

Setup

information interface.

Driving

Turns the driving position memory system on and

Position Memory Position Link

On*1/Off

off.

Setup*

Remote Start System

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

On*1/Off

On/Off

Keyless

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

Driver Door Only*1/All

driver’s door handle.

Doors

Vehicle

Access

Keyless Access Light

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you

Setup

On*1/Off

Flash

unlock/lock the doors.

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock

On*1/Off

the doors.

Interior Light Dimming

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

60seconds/30seconds*1/

Time

on after you close the doors.

15seconds

Lighting

Headlight Auto Off

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60seconds/30seconds/

Setup

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

15seconds*1/0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity*

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 389

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

Illumination

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in

Min/Low/Mid*1/High/Max

Lighting

Sensitivity

the AUTO position.

Setup

Auto Headlight ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation

when the headlights automatically come on while

On*1/Off

With Wiper ON

the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

Auto Door Lock

Used to change the setting for when the doors

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift

automatically lock.

from P/Off

All Doors When Driver’s

Vehicle

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

Door Opens*1/All Doors

Auto Door Unlock

When Shifted to Park/All

automatically.

Doors When Ignition

Door/

Switched Off/Off

Window

Key and Remote

Sets up the driver’s door or all the doors to unlock

Setup

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Unlock Mode

on the first push of the remote.

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

On*1/Off

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Security Relock

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

90seconds/60seconds/

and the security system to set after you unlock

Timer

30seconds*1

the vehicle without opening any door.

*1:Default Setting

390

Customized Featuresu
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Door/

Walk Away Auto

Changes the settings for the auto lock function

Window

On/Off*1

Lock

when you walk away from the vehicle.

Setup

Hands-free Access

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a

swift forward in and out kicking motion under

On*1/Off

Mode*

the rear bumper.

Power

Changes the keyless setting for when the power

Anytime*1/When

Tailgate

Keyless Open Mode

Vehicle

tailgate opens.

Unlocked

Setup*

Power Open By Outer

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by

Off (Manual only)/

On (Power/

Handle

tailgate outer handle.

Manual)*1

Maintenance Info.

Used to reset the engine oil life display when the

maintenance service has been performed.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle

Yes/No

settings group as default.

Smartphone

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlayTM connection.

Android Auto

Sets up the Android AutoTM connection.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models 391

Customized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Models with Display Audio

Features

 

Defaulting All the Settings

 

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Next, then select Yes to reset the settings.
Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select OK.

u After selecting OK, the system will reboot.

 

1Defaulting All the Settings

 

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.

HondaLink® P. 322
392

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

 

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

 

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

Features

* Not available on all models 393

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Training HomeLink

 

Models without panoramic roof

 

Red Indicator

 

If it is necessary to erase a previously entered

learned code:

Press and hold the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
Features

 

Models with panoramic roof

Red Indicator

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515.

394

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Training a Button
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

NO

NO

YES

Press and release the HomeLink button. Press

3. Press and hold the

and release the button on the remote every 2

programmed HomeLink

secs.

button for about a sec.

YES

Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from

Does the device (garage

slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly

door opener) work?

blinking? The process should take less than 60

seconds.

YES

NO

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

1Training HomeLink

 

Retraining a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink. Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 – 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not need to press and release the HomeLink button again in step 2.
Erasing Codes

To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.

Features

 

Training

 

Complete HomeLink LED is

constantly on.

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled device should operate.

 

HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.

 

The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

If you have any problems, see the device’s instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

B. Within 30 secs, press and hold the

 

Training Complete

 

programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

395

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

 

Models with color audio system

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

(Pick-up) Button

Volume up

(Phone) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
Volume down

(Talk) Button

(Hang-up/Back) Button

Selector Knob

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an incoming call.

 

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.

(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

 

Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.

Speed Dial P. 411
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

396

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength

Roam Status

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

HFL Mode

Call Name

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Features

 

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 411
397

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus

 

Features

 

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY q or ON w to use HFL.

 

or

Speed Dial*1

Add New

 

Call History

Phonebook

(Existing entry list)

Phone Number

 

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Call History*1

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Received Calls

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Missed Calls

Display the paired phones’s phonebook.

Phonebook*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Dial*1

 

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

398

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Priority Device

Setup

Connect a Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Disconnect All

Devices

Delete Device

Pass-key

 

Pair a phone to the system.

Set a priority device to the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete a previously paired phone.

Create a code for a paired phone.

Features

 

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 399

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

 

Add New

Speed Dial*1

Call History

Phonebook

Phone Number

Existing entry list

Change Speed Dial

 

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Change a previously stored speed dial number.

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Store Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Delete Voice Tag

 

400

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Ringtone

Mobile Phone

Fixed

Caller ID

Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

 

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID.

Features

 

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL

Auto Transfer

when you enter the vehicle.

 

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,

System Clear

and security codes.

 

Continued 401

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (No phone has

been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.

 

4. Select HandsFreeLink from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this

audio system, press and follow the prompts.

 

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .

 

The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.

u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.
If your phone is not ready to be paired or is not paired within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pairing a phone from this audio system: If your phone doesn’t appear on the audio/ information screen, select Refresh and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

402

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Rotate to select Add New Device, then press .
Press to select OK.

u The screen changes to device list.

Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select Refresh and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink®.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by a phone.

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 403

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

 

Rotate to select a desired device name, then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

 

404

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press

.

 

Features

Input a new pairing code, then press .

Continued 405

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Delete Device, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

406

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Ringtone, then press
.

Rotate to select Mobile Phone or Fixed, then press .

Caller ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press .
Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .

1Ring Tone

 

Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.

1Caller ID Information

Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook.

Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed.

Features

 

Continued 407

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Transferring
If pairing between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

1. Press the button or the button.

 

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then

press .

 

3. Rotate to select Auto Transfer.

4. Press to select On or Off.

 

Features

408

To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select System Clear, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 409

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

 

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile Other

Work

Voice

Pager

If a name has four or more numbers, … appears instead of category icons.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

410

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select Add New, then press
.

Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press .
From Call History:

u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

From Phone Number:

u Input the number manually.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.

1Speed Dial

 

When any preset button is pressed, the Speed Dial screen is displayed.

When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Features

 

Continued 411

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To edit a speed dial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press .
Select a new speed dial number, then press
.

 

To delete a speed dial number

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

412

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

To change a voice tag

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

 

Continued 413

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a voice tag

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

414

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press .
Rotate to select a name, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

To make a call using a phone number
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Dial, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 397
Speed Dial P. 411
1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 397
Speed Dial P. 411
Features

 

Continued 415

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using redial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .

3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using redial

 

Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

416

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a speed dial entry
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

 

When any preset button is pressed, the Speed Dial screen is displayed.

Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed dial list.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 411
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

 

voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

Features

Continued 417

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Call
HFL Mode

 

Caller’s Name

 

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the

call.

 

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

Rotate to select the icon, then press .

418

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

To view the available options, press the button.
Rotate to select the option, then press
.

u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

 

1Options During a Call

 

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

 

419

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

 

Models with Display Audio

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

3 4 Buttons

Microphone

ENTER Button

(+ (- Bar

(Display/Information) Button (Talk) Button

(Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HFL is unavailable.

How to customize P. 366
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, select the audio system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
Up to three speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered.

Speed Dial P. 434
Up to three previous calls can be displayed at a time among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

420

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command.

 

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.

3 4 buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

(display/information) button: Select and press ENTER to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Phonebook on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

To go to the Phone Menu screen:

Select to switch the display to the phone screen.
Select MENU.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

 

Continued 421

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

 

1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Battery Level Status

HFL Mode

Caller’s Name

 

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is

connected to HFL.

Roaming Status

Signal Strength

Features

Caller’s Number

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 434
422

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone Settings screen

1.

Select

.

2.

Select

Settings.

3. Select

Phone.

 

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

 

Phone

 

Bluetooth Device List

(Existing entry list)

Connect

Connect

Connect

Disconnect

Connect a paired device to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Features

Add Bluetooth Device

Priority Device Settings

 

Delete

Delete a paired phone.

Pair a new phone to the system.

Priority On/Off Status Enable the system to or disables it

from automatically establishing a

connection with a Bluetooth® device

which has been assigned priority.

Select the priority device over

Audio

another paired audio device(s).

Select the priority device over another

Phone

paired phone(s).

Continued 423

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

 

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

New Entry

Edit

Delete

Manual Input

Import from Call History

Import from Phonebook

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

Change a name.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Delete All Delete all of the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

HondaLink Assist

 

Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.

Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

424

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email

 

Select Account

New Message Notification

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.

Select a text or e-mail message account.

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.

Default

 

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

 

Features

Continued 425

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone Menu screen

1. Select .

 

2. Select MENU.

 

Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Features

New Entry

 

Manual Input

 

Import from Call History

 

Import from Phonebook

 

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

New Entry

 

Manual Input

 

Import from Call History

 

Import from Phonebook

 

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

426

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Phonebook

Redial

Dial

Call History

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Redial the last number dialed.

Enter a phone number to dial.

All

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Display the last outgoing calls.

Dialed

Display the last incoming calls.

Received

Display the last missed calls.

Missed

 

Text/Email

(Existing message list)

Read/Stop

 

Reply

Dial

System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.

See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Features

Select Account

Select a text or e-mail message account.

Continued 427

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

Select .
Select Yes.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select HandsFreeLink from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this

audio system, select HandsFreeLink Not Found, Continue, and then select your phone when it appears on the list. If your phone does not appear, you can select Refresh to search again.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at

the same time. Select Yes and then a device you want to prioritize.

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system.
If your phone is not ready to be paired or is not paired within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM, pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is unavailable.

428

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone
Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Bluetooth Device List.
Select a phone to connect.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

Select Connect , Connect , or Connect .
To change the pairing code setting
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.
Select the Bluetooth tab.
Select Edit Pairing Code.

1To change the currently paired phone

 

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

To change the Bluetooth® connection priority device setting, select Priority Device Settings from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

1To change the pairing code setting

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.

Features

 

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Continued 429

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Bluetooth Device List.
Select a phone you want to delete.
Select Delete.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
430

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options
To turn on or off the text/e-mail

message function

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/Email.
Select Next.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.
To turn on or off the text/e-mail

message notice

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select the Text/Email tab, then New Message Notification.
Select Next.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.
1To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options

 

To use the text/e-mail message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

Features

 

Continued 431

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Ring Tone.
Select Next, then select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

1Ring Tone

 

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Features

432

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Automatic Phone Sync.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Voice

Pager

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Select On or Off.
Continued 433

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 426

Select Speed Dial.
Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:

u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input:

u Input the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No.
Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial

 

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name.

434

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.

Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.

For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

 

Features

To delete a voice tag

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
Continued 435

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To edit a speed dial

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
436

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

To add a new voice tag
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to add phonetic modification to.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

 

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

Features

 

Continued 437

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

7. Select New Voice Tag.

 

Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.

Select Modify.
Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.
438

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To modify a voice tag
Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to modify phonetic modification.
Select a contact name you want to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Modify.
Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

 

You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.

Features

 

Continued 439

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a modified voice tag
1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.

5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.

 

Select the phone for which you want to delete phonetic modification.
Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been selected.

Select OK.
440

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To delete all modified voice tags
1. Select .

2. Select Settings.

 

3. Select System.

Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.

Select Delete All.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select Yes.

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say the voice tag name.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlayTM, phone calls can be made only from Apple CarPlayTM.

Features

 

Continued 441

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

Select .
Select Phonebook.
Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select Search.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering name, if multiple numbers exist select a number.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

You can also select Phonebook on the Phone Menu screen.

You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 434
442

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a phone number
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 426

Select Dial.
Select a number.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.

Select .
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using redial
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 426

Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed.
Go to the Phone Menu screen.

Phone Menu screen P. 426
Select Call History.
Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

 

You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 434
1To make a call using the Call History

The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

Features

 

Continued 443

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 426

Select Speed Dial.
Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

 

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears.

 

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the

call.

 

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry

 

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.

Speed Dial P. 434
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

444

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

Mute Icon

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

 

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call

 

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

 

Features

Continued 445

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text or e-mail message.
Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text or e-mail message is displayed.

 

The system automatically starts reading out the message.

To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message

 

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. Messages sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text and e-mail messages.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/ e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text or e-mail message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On.

To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice P. 431
446

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Selecting a Text/E-mail Message Account
If a paired phone has text or e-mail message accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select the Text/Email tab, then Select Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Text Messages or an e-mail message account you want.

1Selecting a Text/E-mail Message Account

 

You can also select an e-mail message account from the folder list screen or the message list screen.

 

Select

Account

Features

You can only receive notifications from one text or e-

mail message account at a time.

Continued 447

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Displaying Messages
Message List

■ Displaying text messages

1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

2 Phone Menu screen P. 426

2. Select Text/Email.

u Select account if necessary.

3. Select a message.

u The text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

Text Message

Features

 

1Displaying Messages

 

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select (previous) or (next) on the message screen.

448

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

 

Message List

E-mail

Message

Displaying e-mail messages
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 426

Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.

Select a folder.
Select a message.
u The e-mail message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

 

Features

Continued 449

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Read or Stop reading a message

Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

2 Displaying Messages P. 448

Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning.

Features

 

450

Reply to a message

Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

2 Displaying Messages P. 448

Select Reply.
Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

Talk to you later, I’m driving.
I’m on my way.
I’m running late.
OK
Yes
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Making a call to a sender

Go to the text message screen.
Select Dial.

Features

Continued 451

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

In Case of Emergency*
Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

 

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

1In Case of Emergency*

 

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency service when:

You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage areas.
There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator.

* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To enable notification
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 423

Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.

1To enable notification

 

Setting options:

On: Notification is available.
Off: Disable the feature.

Features

453

Compass*

Features

 

When you turn the ignition switch to ON w, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

 

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.

Turn the ignition switch to ON w.
Press and hold the (day/night) button until the display shows the compass setting menu.
Rotate to select Calibration, then press

.

 

Compass Setting Menu Items

When the display changes to Push CAL Start, press .
Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off.

 

1Compass*

 

Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions:

Driving near power lines or stations
Crossing a bridge
Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
When accessories such as antennas and roof racks are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area. While setting the compass:

The (Back) button returns to the previous screen.
* Not available on all models
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection

 

Turn the ignition switch to ON w.
Press and hold the (day/night) button until the display shows the compass setting menu.
Rotate to select Zone, then press .

The display shows the current zone

number.

4. Rotate

to select the zone number of

Zone Number

 

your area (See Zone Map), then press .

 

Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

1Compass Zone Selection

 

The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.

 

Features

455

456

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving 458

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation 463

Driving Safely with a Trailer 466

Towing Behind a Motorhome 468

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information 469

Important Safety Precautions 469

Avoiding Trouble 470

When Driving

Starting the Engine 471, 473

Precautions While Driving 478

Continuously Variable Transmission 479

Shifting 480

Auto Idle Stop 482

ECON Button 488

Front Sensor Camera 489

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow 491

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 507

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .. 511

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System 519

LaneWatchTM* 525

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control

SystemTM* 527

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 528

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –

Required Federal Explanation 532

Braking

Brake System 534

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 540

Brake Assist System 541

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 542

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped 552

Multi-View Rear Camera 558

Refueling 560

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 563

Turbo Engine Vehicle 564

* Not available on all models 457

Before Driving

Driving

 

Driving Preparation

 

Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.

u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.

Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 596

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks

 

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

458

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

Maximum Load Limit P. 461
Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.

If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 151
Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Adjusting the Seats P. 203
Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 209
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 200
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 201
1Interior Checks

 

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

 

Continued 459

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
Fastening a Seat Belt P. 45
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 84

 

Driving

460

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit

 

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.

Specifications P. 650
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

Specifications P. 650
Driving

 

Continued 461

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving

 

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

550 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

100 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

(45 kg)

1Maximum Load Limit

 

Towing a Trailer:

See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a tailer.

Towing a Trailer P. 463
462

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation

Towing Load Limits

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

1Towing Load Limits

 

WARNING
Total Load

 

Tongugue Loadd

Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.

Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight.

Excessive tongue load reduces front tire traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.

Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the tongue load.

Break-in Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.

Gross weight information

Specifications P. 650
Driving

 

Continued 463

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving

 

Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing.

Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes
Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

 

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and setup of the equipment.

Improper installation and setup can affect the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.

Trailer packages and products:

Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc.
Wiring harness kit
Trailer hitch kit
Trailer brakes P. 464 Are available at a dealer.
464

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

 

Grand (Black)

Left Turn Signal (Light Blue)

Right Turn Signal (Light Green)

+B Trailer (White)

Small (Violet)

Brake Light (Pink)

We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter.

They are designed for your vehicle.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.

1Trailer light

 

The trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.

Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the correct connector and pins.

Driving

 

465

Towing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Driving

 

Driving Safely with a Trailer

Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 463

Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while driving.
Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
Turn off the Auto Idle Stop system using the Auto Idle Stop OFF button. The trailer weight can affect your vehicle’s brake effectiveness if Auto Idle Stop is activated on a hill while towing a trailer.
Towing Speeds and Gears
Drive slower than normal.
Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Turning and Braking
Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
Allow more time and distance for braking.
Do not brake or turn suddenly.
1Driving Safely with a Trailer

 

Operating speed when towing a trailer is restricted up to 65 mph (100 km/h).

Parking

In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.

466

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving in Hilly Terrain
Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the white (H) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.

Driving

467

Towing a TraileruTowing Behind a Motorhome
Towing Behind a Motorhome

 

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

Emergency Towing P. 646

Driving

468

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

General Information

 

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.

If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions

 

To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations:

Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 461

Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

 

WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual.
Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

Important Handling Information P. 38
Precautions While Driving P. 478
Driving

 

469

 

Driving

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Avoiding Trouble

 

Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.
Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.
Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
Crossing a Stream – Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
470

When Driving

Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine

 

Electric Parking Brake Switch

 

Brake Pedal

Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

Check that the shift lever is in P, then depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in N, it is safer to start it in P.

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

 

Turn the ignition switch to START e without depressing the accelerator pedal.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10 seconds.

If the engine does not start right away, wait for at least 30 seconds before trying again.
If the engine starts, but then immediately stops, wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.

Driving

Continued 471

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

Starting to Drive
Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in D. Select R when reversing.
With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 534

Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Move the shift lever to D, S, or L when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Starting the Engine

 

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

Immobilizer System P. 165
You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

472

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Models with smart entry system

 

Starting the Engine

 

Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

 

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Check that the shift lever is in P, then depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle

 

in N, it is safer to start it in P.

Brake Pedal

1Starting the Engine

 

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft.

If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

Immobilizer System P. 165
Driving

 

Continued 473

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift to P.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1Starting the Engine

 

Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak.

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 627
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.

474

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*
You can remotely start the engine using the button on the smart entry remote.

To start the engine

Press the

button, then press and hold

the

button.

Go within the range,

Some exterior lights flash once.

and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

Some exterior lights flash six Exterior lights will not flash if

times if the engine starts the engine does not start.

successfully.

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously.

To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the

 

button, then press and hold the button.

u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully.

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. The range may be less when the vehicle is running. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if:

You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the audio/information screen*.
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The gear is in a position other than (P.
The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is unlocked.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued

475

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

To stop the engine

Go within the range,

and try again.

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the smart entry system range. The engine will not stop.

Press and hold the

button for one The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.

second.

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback*

 

You have already used the remote twice to start the engine.
Another registered smart entry remote is in the vehicle.
There is an antenna failure.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The security system alarm is not set.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside:

The air conditioning is activated in recirculation mode.
When it is cold outside:

The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature.
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are activated.
The seat and heated steering wheel are activated*
2 Heated Steering Wheel*1 P. 229

2 Front Seat Heaters* P. 230

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Starting to Drive

When the engine was started using the button* on the smart entry remote

Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button simultaneously.
When the engine was started in any case

 

Put the shift lever in D. Select R when reversing.
With the parking brake is applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator goes off.

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. Move the shift lever to D, S, or L when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Starting to Drive

 

When the engine was started using the button* on the smart entry remote

The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models 477

When DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving

 

Precautions While Driving

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on roof.
Roof load capacity is 165 lbs (75 kg), available roof racks/carriers may have lower capacities. Please check accessory’s information (Honda accessory).
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving

 

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored.

Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

478

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission

Creeping

The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

1Precautions While Driving

 

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q*1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

Important Handling Information P. 38
Precautions While Driving P. 478
Driving

 

479

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shifting

 

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions
Park

Used when parking or starting the engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Transmission is not locked

Drive

Used for normal driving

Drive (S)

Used:

● For better acceleration

● To increase engine braking

Release Button

● When going up or down hills

Low

● Used to further increase engine braking

● Used when going up or down hills

 

1Shifting

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

 

480

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Lever Operation

Tachometer’s red zone

Shift Lever Position Indicator

(Transmission System Indicator)

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

1Shift Lever Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the indicator of the currently selected gear position, or the transmission system indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Driving

 

481

* Not available on all models

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving

 

Auto Idle Stop

 

To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.

The engine then restarts once the vehicle is about to move again, and the indicator (green) goes off.

 

2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

P. 486

The environmental and vehicle conditions that impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are varied.

Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 484, 485
If the driver’s door is opened while the

indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds

to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function

is in operation.

A message associated with Auto Idle Stop

appears on the driver information interface or

the audio/information screen*.

Indicators P. 84
Customized Features P. 127, 366
1Auto Idle Stop

 

The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details.

The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:

Increase in the ECON mode, compared to when the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.
2 ECON Button P. 488

482

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
Auto Idle

To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press

this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops.

Stop

u Auto Idle Stop system will stop and the

Indicator

(Amber)

indicator (amber) will come on.

 

The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

 

Auto Idle Stop

OFF Button

1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

 

If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.

 

Driving

Continued 483

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving

 

Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
The vehicle stops with the shift lever in D and the brake pedal depressed.

When you shift into P quickly with depressing the brake pedal, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released.

u If you move the shift lever slowly, the engine may automatically restarts.

Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
The engine coolant temperature is low or high.
The transmission fluid temperature is low or high.
The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h) after the engine starts.
Stopped on a steep incline.
The transmission is in a position other than D.
The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate Auto Idle Stop.

The battery charge is low.
The internal temperature of the battery is 41°F (5°C) or less.
The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F (−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
is ON (indicator on).
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:

 

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically.

In this case, restart the engine with the ignition switch* or the ENGINE START/STOP button*.

Starting the Engine P. 471, 473
Models with smart entry system

Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restart automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.

Starting the Engine P. 473
When ACC with Low Speed Follow is in operation, the vehicle stops without depressing the brake pedal and Auto Idle Stop may activate.

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly.

• The steering wheel is operated.

• The fan speed is high.

• Altitude is high.

• The vehicle is repeatedly accelerated and decelerated at a low speed.

• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.

• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.

 

Driving

Continued 485

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving

 

The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
The brake pedal is released (without the automatic brake hold system activated).
The accelerator pedal is depressed (with the automatic brake hold system activated).
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 538

When the transmission is put into P from D or N on a slope (without the automatic brake hold system activated).
The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.

• A steering wheel is operated.

• The transmission is put into R, S, and L, or when it is set from N to D. u If you put the transmission into P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto

Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you move the shift lever other than P. When operating the shift lever, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed.

• The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.

• The brake pedal is released slightly during a stop.

• The battery charge becomes low.

• The accelerator pedal is depressed.

• The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.

• is ON (indicator on).

• The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.

• The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.

• The vehicle ahead of you starts again when your vehicle stops automatically with ACC with Low Speed Follow.

1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

 

If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.

1The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when:

*1: With the automatic brake hold system activated, you can release the brake pedal during Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

If the automatic brake hold system has been turned off, or if there is a problem with the system, the engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal.

486

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Starting Assist Brake Function
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine.

This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.

 

Driving

487

When DrivinguECON Button
ECON Button

 

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.

 

Driving

1ECON Button

 

While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations.

488

When DrivinguFront Sensor Camera
Front Sensor Camera

 

The camera, used in systems; such as RDM, LKAS, ACC with Low Speed Follow, auto high-beam and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera

 

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

Front Sensor Camera

 

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Driving

 

Continued 489

When DrivinguFront Sensor Camera

Driving

1Front Sensor Camera

 

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument

panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent

the system from detecting lane lines properly.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate:Camera Temperature Too High:

message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the air flow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate:Clean Front Windshield: message

appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
490

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.

 

When to use

The camera is

located behind

the rearview

mirror.

The radar sensor is inside the front grille.

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.

Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good weather conditions.

WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.

Driving

 

Continued 491

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

How to activate the system

How to use

ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.

ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

■ Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

 

When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with Low Speed Follow and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 498
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:

On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC with Low Speed Follow will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
492

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Set the Vehicle Speed
−/SET Button

 

On when ACC with Low

Speed Follow begins

Press and release

When driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins.

When driving slower than 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary and a vehicle is detected ahead, your vehicle speed can be set, even with the brake pedal depressed.

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

 

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 118, 366
The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 493

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Set Vehicle Distance

 

Set Vehicle Speed

 

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts

operating, the vehicle icon, distance bars and

set speed appear on the driver information

interface.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow,

Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric

Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to

automatically compensate for natural steering

pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for

you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving

494

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-Interval P. 501

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

 

A vehicle icon appears on the

driver information interface

1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Even if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
Driving

 

Continued 495

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
There is no vehicle ahead
1When in Operation

 

vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe distance when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 498
Driving

 

When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

496

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and
slows to a stop

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the driver information interface.

 

When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the driver information interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or –/ SET button, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed.

If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depressing the accelerator pedal will resume operation of ACC with Low Speed Follow within the prior set speed.

 

1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop

 

WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

 

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Driving

Continued 497

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Vehicle conditions
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong size, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The camera temperature gets too high.
The parking brake is applied.
When the front grille is dirty.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

 

The radar sensor for ACC with Low Speed Follow is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 542
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 489
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock, embankment, etc.
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
498

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Detection limitations
A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Driving

 

Continued 499

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET button on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then push and release the –/SET button, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

500

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Set or Change Following-Interval
Press the (Interval) button to change the

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow following-

interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through extra

long, long, middle, and short following-

interval.

Interval Button

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

regulation.

Driving

 

Continued 501

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

 

Following-Interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

83 feet

100 feet

Short

25 meters

31 meters

1.1 sec

1.1 sec

110 feet

137 feet

Middle

33 meters

42 meters

1.5 sec

1.5 sec

154 feet

200 feet

Long

47 meters

61 meters

2.1 sec

2.1 sec

Extra

204 feet

272 feet

62 meters

83 meters

Long

2.8 sec

2.9 sec

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the distance between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow distance setting.

502

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Cancel

CANCEL

Button

MAIN

Button

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button.
u ACC with Low Speed Follow indicator goes off.

Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward.
1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

 

Driving

Continued 503

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too close to your vehicle.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.

The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
The engine is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation

 

Even though ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves, then press the –/SET button.

504

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

 

ACC with

 

Low Speed

Follow ON

When to use
Cruise Control ON

Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the button again for one second.

 

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 118, 366
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 505

When DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Driving

 

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button.
Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically.

506

When DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.

 

Customized Features P. 127, 366
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure

message appears on the driver information interface.

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking.

u Braking is applied only when the lane

markings are solid continuous lines.

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid

crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations.

Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 489
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 509
There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

Driving

 

Continued 507

When DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving

 

How the System Activates
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking or steering.
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the driver information interface* or the audio/information screen*, the message below will appear in case the system determines a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
1How the System Activates

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on.

Indicators P. 84
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:

Not driven within a traffic lane.
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane.
Driven in a narrow lane.
508

* Not available on all models

When DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
RDM On and Off
Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off.

 

u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the driver information interface when the system is on.

Indicator RDM Button

RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.
1RDM On and Off

 

When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the driver information interface* or the audio/information screen*, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 509

When DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving

 

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
When driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.
510

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Important Safety Reminders

Steering input assist

The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

Front sensor camera
Monitors the lane lines

Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 103
Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

The LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 517
Driving

 

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.

If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 489
Continued 511

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane, when the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

 

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

Driving

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

 

Warning Area

Warning Area

512

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.

The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
The vehicle speed is between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

How to activate the system
MAIN Button

 

LKAS Button

Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information

interface.

The system is ready to use.

Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver

information interface.

The system is activated.

Driving

 

Continued 513

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

To cancel

MAIN Button

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

To cancel the LKAS:

Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

1When the System can be Used

 

The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines again, it comes back on automatically.

1To cancel

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with Low Speed Follow on and off.

LKAS Button

514

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

 

The system operation is suspended if
you:

Set the wipers to continuous operation. u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.

Decrease the vehicle speed to 40 mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the

brake pedal.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

 

Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate intermittently.

Driving

 

Continued 515

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is quickly turned.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.

Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets too high.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.

• When driving through a sharp curve.

• When driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).

• When the ABS or VSA® systems engage.

A beeper will sound if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

516

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

The LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markings.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.

Driving

Continued 517

When DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
When driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.
518

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

 

VSA® System

Indicator

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

Driving

 

Continued 519

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving

 

VSA® On and Off

VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.

To partially disable VSA® functionality/

features, press and hold it until you hear a

beep.

Your vehicle will have normal braking and

cornering ability, but traction control function

will be less effective.

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press

the

(VSA® OFF) button until you hear a

beep.

VSA® is turned on every time you start the

engine, even if you turned it off the last time

you drove the vehicle.

 

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

520

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist

 

Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist

 

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

 

Driving

521

When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
Blind spot information System*

 

Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes.

How the system works
1Blind spot information System *

 

WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.

Driving

 

The transmission is in (D.
Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h)
Alert zone range

Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:

 

underneath the

rear bumper A

corners B

Alert Zone

C

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, blind spot information system has limitations. Over reliance on blind spot information system may result in a collision.

The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur.

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not Available driver information interface appearing.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
When the system detects a vehicle

Blind spot information System Alert Indicator: Located on the outside rearview mirror on both sides.

Comes on when
A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle.
You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and the beeper sounds when
You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times.

Comes On

Blinks

1Blind spot information System *

 

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions:

A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more than two seconds.
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
You can change the setting for blind spot information system.

Customized Features P. 366
Turn the system off when towing a trailer.

The system may not work properly for the following reasons:

The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the radar coverage.
The trailer itself can be detected by the radar sensors, causing the blind spot information system alert indicators to come on.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 523

When DrivinguBlind spot information System*

Driving

1Blind spot information System *

 

Blind spot information system may be adversely

affected when:

Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are detected.
An object that does not reflect radio waves well, such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
Driving on a curved road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
The system picks up external electrical interference.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
Making a turn at an intersection.
Driving on a bumpy road.
Making a short turn that slightly tilts the vehicle.
For proper blind spot information system use:

Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
The system does not operate when in (R.

* Not available on all models
When DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
LaneWatchTM*

 

LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.

 

1LaneWatchTM*

 

WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

The system activates when you:

Move the turn signal Press the LaneWatch

lever to the passenger button.

side.

The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

 

Important Safety Reminder

The system deactivates when you:

Pull the turn signal Press the LaneWatch

lever back. button again.

Audio/Information Screen Camera

Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions:

Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered, changing the height of the vehicle.
Your tires are over or under inflated.
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.
Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 525

When DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.

Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when you operate the turn signal lever.
Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining Lane Watch display time after you pull the turn signal lever back.
Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
1LaneWatchTM*

 

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique

lens makes objects on the screen look slightly different from what they are.

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R.

Driving

 

monitor.

Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 366

Reference Lines

3

2

1

Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 is farther away.

For proper LaneWatch operation:

• The camera is located in the passenger side door

mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera

lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,

moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers

of any kind.

• Do not touch the camera lens.

1Reference Lines

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if:

The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle.
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*

 

When the system senses a loss of front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.

You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.

If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.

1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*

 

NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.

The AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 602

Driving

* Not available on all models 527

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving

 

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

 

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS

Low Tire

Pressure/

indicator to come on and a message to appear

TPMS

on the driver information interface.

Indicator

 

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

 

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather.
Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 596
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:

You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the steering wheel.
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions:

A compact spare tire is used.
There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires, such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at calibration.
Snow chains are used.
528

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:

Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
Rotate the tires.
Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:

Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 596

Make sure:

The vehicle is at a complete stop.
The shift lever is in P.
The ignition switch is in ON w*1.
1TPMS Calibration

 

TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is

installed.

The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-65 mph (48-105 km/h).

During calibration, if the ignition is turned off then on

again, and the vehicle is not moved within 45

seconds, the low tire pressure indicator may come on

briefly. This is normal and indicates that the

calibration process is not yet complete.

If the snow chains are installed, remove them before

calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even

when the properly inflated specified regular tires are

installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the

same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a

dealer for details.

Driving

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 529

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving

 

Models with color audio system

 

You can calibrate the system from the customized features on the driver information interface.

Press the button then 3 / 4 button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the ENTER button.
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.

Press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.

Press the 3 / 4 button and select Calibrate, then press the ENTER button. u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Calibration Failed To Start message appears, repeat steps 2-3.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
1TPMS Calibration

 

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

530

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with Display Audio

 

You can calibrate the system from the

customized feature on the audio/information

screen.

Set the power mode to ON.
Select .
Select Settings.
Select Vehicle.
Select TPMS Calibration.
Select Cancel or Calibrate.

u When the calibration is complete, the

display returns to the customization

menu screen.

If the Calibration Failed To Start. message appears, repeat step 6.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
Driving

 

531

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation
U.S. models

 

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation

 

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

 

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

532

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Driving

 

533

Braking

Brake System

Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

1Braking

 

When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is because the brake system is in operation, and it is

Driving

 

Electric Parking

 

Brake Switch

 

Electric Parking

Brake Switch

To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the ignition switch*1 is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely.

u The parking brake and brake system indicator comes on.

To release
The vehicle must be ON w*1 in order to release the electric parking brake.

Depress the brake pedal.
Press the electric parking brake switch. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.

normal.

1Parking Brake

You may hear the electric parking brake system operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the 12-volt battery goes dead.

If the Battery Is Dead P. 629
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA® system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.

In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates.

• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake

hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your

vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system is applied.

• When the engine is turned off while the brake hold

system is applied.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

• When there is a problem with the brake hold

system while brake hold is applied.

534

BrakinguBrake System
Automatic parking brake feature operation
If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:

The parking brake is applied automatically when you turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1.
To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 536

To release automatically
Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

 

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator goes off.

Accelerator Pedal

The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:

You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
The engine is running.
The transmission is not in P or N.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Parking Brake

 

Models with ACC with Low Speed Follow

When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
When the engine is turned off while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Malfunction indicator lamp
Transmission system indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Brake system indicator
VSA® system indicator
ABS indicator
Supplemental restraint system indicator
Driving

 

Continued 535

BrakinguBrake System
Driving

 

Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
With the ignition switch is in ON w*1, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.

Shift the select lever to P.
Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the parking brake switch. u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator has come on.
Pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.
When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the switch.
u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.

u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will remain applied after you turn off the engine.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature for when putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash or when having your vehicle towed. You can follow the procedure explained below.

Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1 and then within 2 seconds push down the parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both

ACC with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator is on.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Parking brake system

 

In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied.

When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated.

Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.

536

BrakinguBrake System
Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Brake Assist System P. 541
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 540
1Foot Brake

 

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Whenever the brakes are activated by CMBSTM or another system that automatically controls braking, the brake pedal is depressed and released in accordance with braking function.

Driving

 

Continued 537

BrakinguBrake System
Automatic Brake Hold
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

 

1Automatic Brake Hold

 

WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove

Turning on the system
Comes

On

Automatic Brake

Hold Button

 

■ Activating the system

■ Canceling the system

On

On

Comes

Goes

On

Off

Brake Pedal

U.S.

Accelerator Pedal

Comes

On

Canada

your foot from the brake pedal.

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.

Driving

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button.

The automatic brake hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.
Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The shift lever must not be in (P or (R.

The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.
Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
Depress the accelerator pedal while the shift lever is in a position other than (P or (N. The brake hold is disengaged and the vehicle starts to move.

The automatic brake hold indicator goes off. The system releases the brake automatically.
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

538

BrakinguBrake System
The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.

• You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to P or R.

The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• The engine is turned off.

• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

Turning off the automatic brake hold system
1Automatic Brake Hold

 

While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do.

When Stopped P. 552
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is off.

1Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Automatic Brake

 

Hold Button

Goes

Off

While the system is on, press the automatic brake hold button again.

u The automatic brake hold system indicator goes off.

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

Driving

 

539

BrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving

 

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

 

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.“

ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:

Wet or snow covered roads.
Roads paved with stone.
Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

 

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size.

When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:

When driving on rough road surfaces, including when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
When tire chains are installed.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:

Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while vehicle is accelerates.
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

540

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

 

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

 

Driving

541

BrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Important Safety Reminder

The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 548
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 489
Be careful not to have radar sensor cover strongly impacted.

542

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

How the system works

When to use

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is in the front grille.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.

The CMBSTM activates when:

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with:
Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your same direction.
A pedestrian who is detected in front of you.
Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your same direction.
1How the system works

 

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

Driving

 

Continued 543

BrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

When the system activates

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts

Beep

Audible Alert

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system’s earliest collision alert will come on through the driver information interface* or the audio/information screen* setting options.

Customized Features P. 127, 366
1How the system works

 

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians.

However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions.

Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 548
* Not available on all models
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Distance between vehicles

CMBSTM

The sensors detect a vehicle

Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Braking

When in Long, visual and

NORMAL

Vehicle

audible alerts come on at a

Stage

LONG SHORT

Ahead

There is a risk of a collision with

longer distance from a vehicle

one

the vehicle ahead of you.

ahead than in Normal setting,

and in Short, at a shorter

Your Vehicle

distance than in Normal.

Stage

Your

Vehicle

The risk of a collision has

Vehicle

Ahead

increased, time to respond is

Lightly applied

two

reduced.

Visual and audible alerts.

Stage

Your

Vehicle

The CMBSTM determines that a

Vehicle

Ahead

Forcefully applied

three

collision is unavoidable.

 

Driving

 

Continued 545

BrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

CMBSTM On and Off
Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.

 

When the CMBSTM is off:

• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument panel comes on.

• A message on the driver information interface reminds you that the system is off.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start

the engine, even if you turned it off the last

time you drove the vehicle.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 548
When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire pressure/TPMS, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

546

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.

Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to radar sensor area. This can impact CMBSTM operation.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g. the warning message appears too frequently).

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock, embankment, etc.
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
Driving

 

Continued 547

BrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 489

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, pedestrians or other vehicles may not be detected).
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast on a snowy or wet roadway).
Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

 

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or

removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly

impacted, turn off the system by pressing the

CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

548

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

Driving

Continued 549

BrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Detection limitations
A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed.
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
550

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

 

When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
When the pedestrian is slouching or squatting.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 7 feet (2 meter) in height.
When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands or raised or they are running.
When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Automatic shutoff
CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when:

The temperature inside the system is high.
You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Driving

 

551

Parking Your Vehicle

Driving

 

When Stopped

 

Depress the brake pedal firmly.
With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly, but fully.
Move the shift lever from D to P.
Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.

Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

 

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift lever position indicator.

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

After shutting off the engine, you may hear certain noises coming from the vehicle. Here’s the lowdown:

Noise from Under Vehicle: This noise is caused by
the vacuum pump inside the fuel evaporation leakage check module (ELCM).

Depending on conditions, the pump will come on for about 15 minutes about 5 to 10 hours after engine shutoff. This noise is just normal vehicle operation and don’t indicate a vehicle problem.

552

Parking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
1When Stopped

 

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:

Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle stops completely.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake

may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are

expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if

parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so

they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the

slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from

moving. If you do not take either precaution, the

vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

Driving

 

553

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

 

Driving

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Radar sensors:

 

Underneath the rear bumper

corners

The system activates when:

The power mode is in ON.
The Cross Traffic Monitor system is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 557

The transmission is in R.
Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or lower.
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect an approaching vehicle, or may delay alerting you under the following conditions:

• An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,

near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the

radar sensor’s scope.

• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph

(5 km/h) or higher.

• A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than

between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25

km/h).

• The system picks up external interference such as

other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong

radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

 

• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with

snow, ice, mud or dirt.

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.

The system does not detect or provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

• When there is bad weather.

• Your vehicle is on an incline.

• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.

• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a

vehicle, and so on.

• The rear bumper or the sensors have been

improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been

deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.

Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 555

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

When the System Detects a Vehicle

If the

on the lower right changes to

when the

Arrow Icon

transmission is in (R, mud snow or ice may have

accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. Check the

bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly

clean the area if necessary.

If the

comes on when the transmission is in (R,

there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic

Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your

Normal View

Wide View

Top Down View

vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information

in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera

screen.

system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.

Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

 

Driving

556

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Camera.
Select Cross Traffic Monitor.
Select On or Off, then select OK.

Icon

 

The system can also be turned on and off on

the audio/information screen by pressing the

CTM icon.

 

Driving

557

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to R.

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Driving

 

Approx.

39 inches (1 m)

Approx.

20 inches (50 cm)

Tailgate Open

Range

Camera

Bumper

Wide View Mode

Normal View Mode

Top Down View Mode

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

Models with color audio system

You can change the Camera Guideline On or Off settings.

Customized Features P. 359
Guidelines

Models with Display Audio

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.

Customized Features P. 366
Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

558

Multi-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the selector knob to switch the angle.

Models with Display Audio

 

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.

: Wide view

: Normal view

: Top down view

 

All models

 

If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power system, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
Driving

 

559

Refueling

Driving

 

Fuel Information

Fuel recommendation

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 14 US gal (53 L)
1Fuel Information

 

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

560

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
How to Refuel

 

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

1.

Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2.

Turn off the engine.

Pull

3.

Pull on the fuel fill door release handle

under the lower left corner of the

dashboard.

u The fuel fill door opens.

 

1How to Refuel

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

Driving

 

Continued 561

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving

 

Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level.

u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically.

u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5.0 L) of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds

before removing the filler nozzle.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

 

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 648
562

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface.

Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 577

Maintain the specified tire pressure.
Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance.
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven

Gallons of

Miles per

fuel

Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test.

For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https:/www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel consumption testing” in the search field at the top of the page.

 

Driving

563

Turbo Engine Vehicle

Handling Precautions

 

The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by the engine’s exhaust gas pressure.

When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden acceleration.
Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance Minder. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal noise of the turbine bearing.

Driving

1Turbo Engine Vehicle

 

The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing the filter is indicated on the driver information interface. Follow the information of when to replace them.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 569
The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

564

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter …..

580

Wear Indicators ………………………….

601

Inspection and Maintenance …………

566

Engine Coolant …………………………..

582

Tire Service Life…………………………..

601

Safety When Performing Maintenance ..

567

Transmission Fluid……………………….

584

Tire and Wheel Replacement ………..

602

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Brake Fluid…………………………………

585

Tire Rotation………………………………

603

Service …………………………………….

568

Refilling Window Washer Fluid………

586

Winter Tires ……………………………….

604

Maintenance MinderTM …………………

569

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………..

587

Battery………………………………………..

605

Maintenance Under the Hood

Remote Transmitter Care

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades …

592

Maintenance Items Under the Hood. 575

Replacing the Button Battery ………..

607

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Opening the Hood ………………………

576

Climate Control System Maintenance

609

Checking Tires ……………………………

596

Recommended Engine Oil …………….

577

Cleaning

Tire and Loading Information Label ……

597

Oil Check …………………………………..

578

Interior Care ………………………………

610

Tire Labeling ………………………………

597

Adding Engine Oil……………………….

579

Exterior Care………………………………

612

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)..

599

Accessories and Modifications……….

615

565

Before Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Inspection and Maintenance

 

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 29

Periodic inspections
Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 585

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 596

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 587
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 592
1Inspection and Maintenance

 

U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 572
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

Authorized Manuals P. 660
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

566

Before Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.

Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.

u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

 

567

Before Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

 

Maintenance

568

Maintenance MinderTM

Select the Maintenance Minder to see maintenance items that are due soon and to see the percentage of life remaining in the engine oil.

When the engine oil life is less than 15%, a Maintenance Minder message will appear every time you turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, reminding you to bring your vehicle to a dealer for service.

 

Maintenance

*1: Models with the keyless access system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

569

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

 

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Certain maintenance items due soon, along with the estimated remaining oil life, appear on the driver information interface.

You can view them on the Maintenance Minder screen at any time.

Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
Press the button several times until is displayed.
Press ENTER to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Engine Oil Life

Button

ENTER Button

Main Item

Sub Item

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

 

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

Life (%)

100

100 to 91

90

90 to 81

80

80 to 71

70

70 to 61

60

60 to 51

50

50 to 41

40

40 to 31

30

30 to 21

20

20 to 16

15

15 to 11

10

10 to 6

5

5 to 1

0

0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 572
*1: Models with the keyless access system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

570

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

When you select the Maintenance

Minder screen, it displays codes for

maintenance items due at the next

engine oil change, along with the

percentage of engine oil life

remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon

The engine oil life indicator starts to

The engine oil is approaching the end

appear along with other due-soon

of its service life.

maintenance item codes when the

remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.

Maintenance Due Now

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1

The engine oil has almost reached the

percent. Press the

button to

end of its service life, and the

switch to another display.

maintenance items should be

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

The engine oil has passed its service

The engine oil life has passed.

Maintenance Past Due

life, and a negative distance appears

The maintenance items must be

after driving over 10 miles (U.S.

inspected and serviced immediately.

models) or 10 km (Canadian models).

The negative distance on the display

blinks.

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance

 

Continued 571

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000

System Message

km).

Maintenance Minder Message

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

Indicator

they are noisy.

 

Main Item

Sub Items

U.S. models

 

Maintenance

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 657.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace rear differential fluid*
● Replace brake fluid*5

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 256,000 km (160,000

miles).

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3

if they are noisy.

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 657.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace rear differential fluid*
● Replace brake fluid*5

● Service front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models Continued 573

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

Resetting the Display
Reset the Maintenance Minder display if you have performed the maintenance service.

 

ENTER Button

(Display/Information) Button

Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
Press the (display/information) button repeatedly until the appears.
Press the ENTER button.
Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
Press 3 / 4 to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
Repeat from step 4 for other items you wish to reset.
*1: Models with the keyless access system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Resetting the Display

 

NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

Models with Display Audio

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

How to customize P. 366
Models with color audio system

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the driver information interface.

574

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

 

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange)

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Battery

 

Maintenance

575

Maintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Opening the Hood

 

Hood Release Handle

 

Pull

 

Lever

 

Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
Pull the hood release handle under the lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
1Opening the Hood

 

WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

Maintenance

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

 

Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

576

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

 

Honda Genuine Motor Oil
Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

 

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements.

1Recommended Engine Oil

 

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

Ambient Temperature

 

Use Honda Genuine Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for

the ambient temperature as shown.

Maintenance

 

Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

577

Maintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Oil Check

 

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange).
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and

lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

 

1Oil Check

 

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

Under certain driving conditions, it is normal for the engine oil level to rise above the upper mark. If you have a concern, consult a dealer for details.

Maintenance

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

578

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

 

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Add oil slowly.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.

Engine Oil

Fill Cap

1Adding Engine Oil

 

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

 

Maintenance

579

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. Specialized equipment and procedures are required to change the engine oil and oil filter. Have an authorized Honda dealer replace them.

Do not attempt to change the engine oil and oil filter yourself.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Maintenance

 

Screw

Under Cover

 

Drain Bolt

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Remove the phillips head screws and slotted head screws by turning 90° counterclockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.
Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
Washer

580

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to

the engine contact surface.

u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the

contact surface of the engine block, and

install a new oil filter.

Oil Filter

u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to

the oil filter gasket.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

Reinstall the under cover in the same order it was removed.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

Be sure to verify that the oil filter is designed for your vehicle. A Honda genuine oil filter is recommended for optimum lubrication flow and filtration properties to assure the reliability of the engine.

Maintenance

 

581

Maintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance

 

Engine Coolant

 

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

Checking the Coolant
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

 

Reserve Tank

2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.

u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

MAX MIN

1Engine Coolant

 

WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the reserve tank cap.

NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

582

Maintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Adding the Coolant

Reserve Tank

Cap

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Turn the reserve tank cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Push down and turn the reserve tank cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark.
Put the reserve tank cap back on, and tighten it fully.
1Adding the Coolant

 

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

 

Maintenance

583

Maintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid yourself.

 

1Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

Maintenance

584

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Brake Fluid

 

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid
Reserve Tank The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve

 

tank.

MAX

MIN

1Brake Fluid

 

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

 

Maintenance

585

Maintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

 

Canadian models

 

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.

All models

 

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

 

Maintenance

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.

586

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)*

LED type*

Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)*

LED type*

1Headlight Bulbs

 

Models with halogen headlights

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

High Beam Headlights

Bulb

Tab

Coupler

Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise.
Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Models with LED headlights

 

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models Continued 587

Replacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
Maintenance

 

Low Beam Headlights

Holding clip

 

Bulb

Tab

Coupler

Passenger side

 

Remove the holding clip using a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the upper part of the window washer reserve tank.
Both side

 

Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise.
Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
1Low Beam Headlights

 

Holding clip

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip.

Center pin

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Push until the

pin is flat.

588

Fog Lights*

 

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

 

Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal/Front Side Marker Lights

 

Front turn signal lights/front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

 

Side turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Lights

 

Brake/taillight, rear turn signal light and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights*

 

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 589

Replacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

Taillight: LED

Back-Up Light: 16W

 

Cover

Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda

dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

 

2.

Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

Remove the old bulb.

Bulb

3.

Insert a new bulb.

 

Socket

590

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light

Rear License Plate Light

 

Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light

 

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

 

Maintenance

591

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

 

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

Maintenance

 

Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.

Tab

592

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Pull the end of the wiper blade to the

Blade

direction of the arrow in the image until it

unfastens from the holder’s end cap.

End Cap At

The Bottom

Pull the wiper blade in the opposite

Blade

direction to slide it out of the holder.

Holder

 

Blade

Holder

Cap

Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade.

Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab.
Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side.
Maintenance

 

593

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

 

1. Raise the wiper arm off.

Wiper Arm

 

Pivot the bottom end of the holder up until
it comes off from the wiper arm.

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the rear window.

Maintenance

 

Slide the blade out of the holder.

Blade

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and

 

Retainer

mount to a new rubber blade.

594

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.

Holder

u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the

wiper arm.

 

Maintenance

595

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Maintenance

 

Checking Tires

 

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20 kPa, 0.1–0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
Excessive tread wear.
Wear Indicators P. 601
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires

 

WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 528
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.

596

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

 

Label

Example

Tire Labeling

 

1Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains:

a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Example Tire Size

 

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

P235/60 R18 102T

P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

235: Tire width in millimeters.

60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

18: Rim diameter in inches.

102: Load index (a numerical code associated with

the maximum load the tire can carry).

T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

Maintenance

 

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

maximum speed rating).

Continued 597

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

22 09: Date of manufacture.

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Year

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Week

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

 

Maintenance

598

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

 

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

 

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Maintenance

 

Continued 599

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance

 

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction

 

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

600

Wear Indicators

 

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Example of a Wear

 

Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)

shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the

tread has worn so that the indicator is

exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

 

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Maintenance

 

601

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire‘s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

 

Maintenance

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.

602

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information

1Tire Rotation

interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

■ Tires without rotation marks

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Front

Direction Mark

 

Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the

TPMS.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

P. 528

Front

Maintenance

 

603

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance

 

Winter Tires

 

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked “M+S” tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:

Install them on the front tires only.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below:
Models with 235/65R17 tires

Models with 235/55R19 tires

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2111MM

Models with 235/60R18 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2212MM

Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
Drive slowly.
1Winter Tires

 

WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

604

Battery

Checking the Battery

 

The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:

The audio system is disabled.
Audio System Theft Protection P. 242
The clock resets*.
Clock P. 138
Canadian models only: The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
Immobilizer System Indicator P. 94
1Battery

 

WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

 

Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 605

BatteryuCharging the Battery
Maintenance

 

Charging the Battery

 

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Battery

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications.

Consult a dealer for more information.

The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.

Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*, Low Tire Pressure/TPMS, and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1 after re-connecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph

(20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

 

* Not available on all models
Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery

 

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*

Screw

Battery type: CR1620

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-head screwdriver.

2. Open the remote transmitter.

Battery

u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a

cloth to prevent scratching the

transmitter.

 

Remove the button battery with the small flat-tip screwdriver.
Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery

 

WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD

The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children.

If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models Continued 607

Remote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
Maintenance

 

Smart Entry Remote*

Battery type: CR2032

Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

Battery

u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

scratching the remote transmitter.

u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

* Not available on all models
Climate Control System Maintenance

Air Conditioning

 

To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter

 

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Climate Control System Maintenance

 

NOTICE

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

Air conditioner label is found under the hood:

Safety Labels P. 81
Specifications P. 650
Canadian models

: Caution

: Flammable Refrigerant

: Requires Registered

Technician to Service

: Air Conditioning

System

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance

 

609

Cleaning

Maintenance

 

Interior Care

 

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

 

Loop

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Interior Care

 

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches.

Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

* Not available on all models
CleaninguInterior Care
Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

1Floor Mats

 

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather:

Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap.
Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 611

 

CleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance

 

Exterior Care

 

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions:

If driving on roads with road salt.
If driving in coastal areas.
If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Fold in the door mirrors.
For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Using High Pressure Cleaners
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior.
Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Washing the Vehicle

 

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

612

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

1Applying Wax

 

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

Maintenance

 

Continued 613

CleaninguExterior Care
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

614

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

 

When installing accessories, check the following:

Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions.
Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 641

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications

 

Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

1Accessories and Modifications

 

WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Maintenance

 

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

615

616

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Overheating

Types of Tools …………………………….

618

How to Handle Overheating………….

633

If a Tire Goes Flat

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

Changing a Flat Tire …………………….

619

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes

Engine Does Not Start

On ………………………………………

635

Checking the Engine ……………………

626

If the Charging System Indicator Comes

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is

On ………………………………………….

635

Weak……………………………………

627

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

Emergency Engine Stop ……………….

628

On or Blinks ……………………………..

636

If the Battery Is Dead …………………..

629

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

Shift Lever Does Not Move …………..

632

On or Blinks ……………………………..

637

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake

System Indicator (Amber) Comes On ..638

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On 639

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks 640

Fuses

Fuse Locations 641

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 645

Emergency Towing 646

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate 647

Refueling 648

617

Handling the Unexpected

 

Tools

Types of Tools

 

1Types of Tools

 

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

Jack

Jack

Funnel

Tool Bag

618

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

 

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.
Put the transmission into P.
Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1.
1Changing a Flat Tire

 

Follow compact spare precautions:

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Handling the Unexpected

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 619

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Open the cargo area floor lid.

Handling the Unexpected

 

2. Take the tool bag out of the cargo area.

Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle

Tool Bag

bar out of the tool bag.

 

Spare Tire

Take the jack out of the spare tire area.
Unscrew the wing bolt and remove the spacer cone. Then remove the spare tire.

620

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Place a wheel block or rock in the front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

Place the compact spare tire under the vehicle body (wheel side up) near the tire that needs to be replaced.

Loosen each wheel nut about one turn

using the wheel nut wrench.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 621

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

How to Set Up the Jack
Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

Turn the end bracket clockwise (as shown in image) until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

 

1How to Set Up the Jack

 

WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or their shape may not match.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:

Jack

Handle

Wheel Nut

Bar

Wrench as Jack Handle

 

Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
Do not use while the engine is running.
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
Use only at the jacking points.
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack.
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

622

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Replacing the Flat Tire
Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order.

Wheel nut torque:

80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

1Replacing the Flat Tire

 

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 623

Handling the Unexpected

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

Storing the Flat Tire

Center Cap

1. Remove the center cap.

3WARNING

Loose items can fly around the interior in a

crash and can seriously injure the

occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely

before driving.

 

Remove the cargo area lid as shown.

Lid

 

For compact spare tire

Wing

Bolt

Spacer Cone For full-size tire

Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
Securely store the wheel nut wrench and jack handle bar back in the tool bag. Store the bag in the cargo area properly.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s end bracket to lock it in place.
624

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low appears on the driver information interface, but this is normal.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.

TPMS Calibration P. 529
Handling the Unexpected

 

625

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

 

If the engine does not start, check the starter. 1Checking the Engine

 

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 629

Starter condition Checklist

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

Starter doesn’t turn or turns over slowly.

The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

The starter turns over normally, but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Models with smart entry system

Check for a message on the driver information interface.

If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 627

uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 176
Check the brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.

If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
Battery P. 605
If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 641
Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 471

Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

Immobilizer System P. 165
Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank.

Fuel Gauge P. 118
Check the fuses.

Check all fuses or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 645
If the problem continues:

Emergency Towing P. 646
626

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system

 

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

 

If the beeper sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface; and the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes and the engine will not start. Start the engine as follows:

Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart

entry remote while the ENGINE START/

STOP button is flashing.

The buttons on the smart entry remote

should be facing you.

u The ENGINE START/STOP button

flashes for about 30 seconds.

Depress the brake pedal and press the

ENGINE START/STOP button within 10

seconds after the beeper sounds and the

ENGINE START/STOP button changes

from flashing to on.

u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

Handling the Unexpected

 

627

Engine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop Models with smart entry system

Handling the Unexpected

 

Emergency Engine Stop

 

The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.

To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Canadian models

 

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal.

1Emergency Engine Stop

 

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

628

If the Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as the audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

Open the terminal cover on your vehicle’s battery positive + terminal.
Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle’s battery + terminal.

3. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.

u When using an automotive battery

+ Terminal

charger to boost your 12-volt battery,

select a lower charging voltage than

15-volts. Check the charger manual for

the proper setting.

Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery – terminal.

1If the Battery Is Dead

 

WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Booster Battery

Continued 629

If the Battery Is Deadu
5. Connect the other end of the second

 

jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt

(as shown). Do not connect this jumper

cable to any other part.

6. If your vehicle is connected to another

vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine

and increase its rpm slightly.

7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it

turns over slowly, check that the jumper

cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

Handling the Unexpected

 

630

If the Battery Is Deadu
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order:

Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery – terminal.
Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

1What to Do After the Engine Starts

 

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM), low tire pressure/TPMS, and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1 after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/ h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

631

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the P position.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Releasing the Lock

Slot

Cover

 

Release Button

Shift Lock Release Slot

Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

 

Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote.
All models

 

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot (as shown in image) and remove the cover.
Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
While pushing the key down, press the shift lever release button, and place the shift lever into N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

632

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

 

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power.
Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the driver information interface.
Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine.

Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When

Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 633

OverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected

Next thing to do

Reserve

Tank

MAX MIN

Last thing to do
Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle goes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.

Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level, and check the cooling system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level, in the reserve tank is low, or no coolant in the tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the reserve tank cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. Add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the reserve tank cap.

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it, and check the temperature gauge.

If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.

 

634

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle
Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
Open the hood and check the oil level.
Oil Check P. 578
Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

 

What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems. Immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

 

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

Handling the Unexpected

 

635

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

 

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system.

Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

Handling the Unexpected

 

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

636

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

U.S. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

 

The brake fluid is low.

• There is a malfunction in the brake system.

■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Canada

Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

(Red)

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

 

Reason for the indicator to blink
There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

 

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 638
Handling the Unexpected

 

637

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

■ If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the

U.S.

same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,

release the parking brake manually or automatically.

Canada

2 Parking Brake P. 534

• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at

(Red)

the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,

stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer

immediately.

u Preventing the vehicle from moving

U.S.

Put the transmission into P.

Canada

• If the brake system indicator (amber) comes on alone, avoid using the

parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

(Amber)

 

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

 

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.

638

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

 

639

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully avoiding abrupt cornering and hard braking.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.

u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

TPMS Calibration P. 529
What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator will go off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

TPMS Calibration P. 529
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

640

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1 and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box.

 

Tab

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Amps

VST 1

(30

A)

Electric Brake Booster

40

A

Main Fan Motor

30

A

1

Relay Module 1

30

A

IG Main 2*2

30

A

−*3

Relay Module 2

30

A

Battery

125 A

EPS

70

A

IG Main 1

30 A*2

50 A*3

2

Fuse Box Option

40

A

Fuse Box 1

60

A

Front Wiper Motor

30

A

Sub Fan Motor

30

A

Rear Defroster

40

A

Starter Motor

30

A

3

Fuse Box 2

40

A

ABS/VSA Motor

40

A

ABS/VSA FSR

40

A

Blower Motor

40

A

Circuit Protected

Amps

Option Block 1*2

(40

A)

−*3

Option Block 2*2

(40

A)

4

−*3

VST 2

(30

A)

Power Tail Gate*2

(40

A)

−*3

5

VB ACT

7.5 A

6

Washer

15

A

7

FI Main

15

A

8

FI Sub

15

A

9

Stop Lights

10

A

10

Injector

20

A

11

LAF

7.5 A

 

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2:Models with smart entry system

*3:Models without smart entry system

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 641

FusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected

 

642

Circuit Protected

Amps

12

FI ECU

10

A

13

Front Wiper Deicer*1

(15

A)

−*2

14

Hazard

10

A

15

IG Coil

15

A

16

Transmission

15

A

17

18

Back Up

10

A

19

20

E-DPS*

(20

A)

21

Rear Seat Heater*1

(20

A)

−*2

22

Front Fog Lights*/Lower

(10

A)

Shutter Grille

Magnetic Clutch/Upper

10 A

23

Shutter Grille*3

VMP MAIN*4

(20 A)

24

Horn

10 A

25

Cooling Fan

7.5 A

26

27

Back Up 2

(30

A)

28

ST Magnetic Switch

(7.5 A)

29

30

31

VMP*4

(10

A)

32

−*4

33

−*4

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected

Amps

34

USB Charger*4

(7.5 A)

35

−*4

36

−*4

*1:Models with smart entry system

*2:Models without smart entry system

*3:Models without navigation system

*4:Models with navigation system

Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Box A
Located under the dashboard.

 

Fuse Label

Fuse Box

Fuse locations are shown on the label on the steering column lower cover.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

FusesuFuse Locations
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

1

Accessory

10

A

2

Key Lock

5 A

3

Option 3

10

A

4

Option 2*1

5 A

Transmission*2

(10

A)

5

Option

10

A

6

SRS Indicator

10

A

7

Meter

10

A

8

Fuel Pump

15

A

9

A/C

10 A

10

Accessory Power Socket

(20

A)

(Center Console)

11

Engine Control

5 A

12 Passenger’s Side Door Lock

10

A

13 Driver’s Side Door Unlock

10

A

14

Rear Driver’s Side Power

20 A

Window

15

Front Passenger’s Side

20 A

Power Window

16

Door Lock

20

A

17

Transmission*1

(10

A)

Option 2*2

5 A

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected

Amps

18

Front Driver’s Lumber

(10

A)

support*

19

Moonroof*

(20

A)

20

Starter

10

A

21

ACG

10 A

22

Daytime Running Light

10

A

23

Steering Wheel Heater*

(10

A)

24

Option

5 A

25

Driver’s Door Lock

(10

A)

26

Passenger’s Side Door

10 A

Unlock

27

Rear Passenger’s Side

20 A

Power Window

28

Driver’s Power Window

20

A

29

Front Accessory Power

20 A

Socket

30

Smart Entry*1

10

A

STS*2

5 A

31

Driver’s Power Seat

(20

A)

Reclining*

32

Front Seat Heater*

(20

A)

33

Driver’s Power Seat Sliding*

(20

A)

34

ABS/VSA

10

A

35

SRS

10

A

36

HAC Option*

20 A

37

Trailer

15

A

38

Driver’s Side Door Lock

10

A

Circuit Protected

Amps

39

Driver’s Door Unlock

(10 A)

a

Power Tailgate Closer*

(20 A)

b

Passenger’s Power Seat

(20 A)

Sliding*

c

Passenger’s Power Seat

(20 A)

Reclining*

d

Panorama Shade Motor

(20 A)

e

Audio Amp

(20 A)

f

EPT L

(20 A)

g

EPT R

(20 A)

h

Accessory Power Socket

(20 A)

(Cargo Area)

 

*1:Models with smart entry system

*2:Models without smart entry system

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

 

643

FusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected

 

Fuse Box B
Located under the dashboard.

Fuse locations are shown on the label under

the steering column.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number and label number.

 

Fuse Label

Fuse Box

Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

A

VST ACC1

5 A

B

+B BACKUP2 MAIN

15 A

C

+B EOP

7.5 A

D

+B VSA

5 A

E

IG1 VSA1

7.5 A

F

IG1 METER VST

5 A

G

IG1 VSA2

7.5 A

 

644

FusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

1.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1. Turn

Blown Fuse

the headlights and all accessories off.

2.

Remove the fuse box cover.

3.

Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

Combined

screwdriver to remove the screw and

replace it with a new one.

Fuse

 

Inspect the small fuses in the engine

Fuse Puller

compartment and the vehicle interior.

u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller, and replace it with a new

one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specific amperage on the fuse label.

Fuse Locations P. 641
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

Handling the Unexpected

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

645

Emergency Towing

Handling the Unexpected

 

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

All models

 

Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

2WD models

 

Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

 

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.

NOTICE

Improper towing, such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

2WD models

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flat bed equipment.

Parking Brake P. 534
646

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure:

Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the inside of the tailgate.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

1If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

 

Following up:

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

Cover

 

Models with power tailgate

Screwdriver

To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing the lever to the right using a flat-tip screw driver.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Lever

 

Models without power tailgate

Screwdriver

Lever

647

Refueling

Handling the Unexpected

 

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Turn off the engine.
Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to make it pop up slightly.
u The fuel fill door opens.

 

3.

Take the funnel out of the tool case in the

cargo area.

2 Types of Tools P. 618

4.

Place the end of the funnel on the lower

Funnel

part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.

u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe.

Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel container.

u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.

u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.

Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

648

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications ………………………………

650

Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers

Testing of Readiness Codes…………..

655

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Warranty Coverages ……………………

657

Engine Number, and Transmission

Authorized Manuals…………………….

660

Number …………………………………..

652

Customer Service Information………

661

Devices that Emit Radio Waves …….

653

Reporting Safety Defects ……………..

654

649

Specifications

Information

 

Vehicle Specifications
Model

CR-V

No. of Passengers:

Front

2

Rear

3

Total

5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Front)

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Rear)

doorjamb

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

15.3

– 17.1 oz (435 – 485 g)

Lubricant Type

RL85HM (POE)

Quantity

4.70

– 6.28 cu-in (77 – 103 cm3)

Engine Specifications
Displacement

91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3)

Spark Plugs

NGK

ILZKAR8J8SY

Fuel
Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 14 US gal (53 L)

Washer Fluid
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)

Tank Capacity

Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

■ Light Bulbs

 

Headlights (Low Beam)

55 W (H11)*

LED*

Headlights (High Beam)

60 W (HB3)*

LED*

Fog Lights*

LED

Front Turn Signal/

LED

Front Side Marker Lights

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights

LED

(on Door Mirrors)*

Brake/Taillights/Rear Turn Signal/

LED

Rear Side Marker Lights

Back-Up Lights

16 W

Taillights

LED

High-Mount Brake Light

LED

Rear License Plate Light

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

8 W*

LED*

Ceiling Light

8 W*

LED*

Cargo Area Lights

5 W

Vanity Mirror Lights*

1.4 W

 

* Not available on all models
uuSpecificationsu

Brake Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
Specified

Honda HCF-2

Capacity

Change

3.9 US qt (3.7 L)*1

4.5 US qt (4.3 L)*2

*1: 2WD models

*2: AWD models

Rear Differential Fluid*
Specified

Honda DPSF-II

Capacity

Change

1.32 US qt (1.247 L)

Engine Oil
Recommended

·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Change

3.4 US qt (3.2 L)

Capacity

Change including

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

filter

Engine Coolant
Specified

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

1.64 US gal (6.19 L)

Capacity

(change including the remaining 0.2 US gal

(0.75 L) in the reserve tank)

■ Tire

Size*1

235/65R17 104H

Pressure*1

Front

32 (220 [2.2])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Rear

30 (210 [2.1])

Size*2

235/60R18 103H

Regular

Pressure*2

Front

33 (230 [2.3])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Rear

30 (210 [2.1])

Size*3

235/55R19 101H

Pressure*3

Front

33 (230 [2.3])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Rear

33 (230 [2.3])

Compact

Size

T155/90D17 112M

Pressure

Spare

60 (420 [4.2])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

17 x 7 1/2J*1

Wheel Size

Regular

18 x 7 1/2J*2

19 x 7 1/2J*3

Compact Spare

17 x 4T

*1: Models with 17 inch wheel

*2: Models with 18 inch wheel

*3: Models with 19 inch wheel

Information

 

* Not available on all models 651

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.

The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows:

 

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Information

 

Engine Number Vehicle Identification Number

Cover

Continuously

Variable

Certification Label/

Transmission Number

Vehicle Identification Number

652

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Information

 

653

Reporting Safety Defects

Information

 

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

654

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

 

Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly.

The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes

 

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Information

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 655

Emissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information

 

656

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Information

 

Continued 657

Warranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
Information

 

658

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

Attention: Warranty Claim

2000 Traverwood Drive,

Ann Arbor, MI 48105;

[email protected]

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

 

659

Authorized Manuals

Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

 

660

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Client Relations/Services.

U.S. Owners Canadian Owners

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Canada Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Services Customer Relations

Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 180 Honda Boulevard

1919 Torrance Blvd. Markham, ON

Torrance, CA 90501-2746 L6C 0H9

Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: [email protected]

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

 

When you call or write, please give us the following information:

Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 652
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the problem
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Information

 

Continued 661

Customer Service Informationu
Information

 

Disclaimer of Pandora®*
Requirements to access Pandora®

Latest version of the Pandora app installed on your Android, Blackberry, or iPhone.
Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http://www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone)
Connection to the internet via Wi-Fi or cellular data network.
Limitations

Access to Pandora requires an active internet connection
Ability to access Pandora through this system is subject to change without notice
Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying tracks, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at
http:// www.pandora.com

<http://www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.

Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply.
Pandora is only available in the United States.
* Not available on all models
Index

Numbers

4WD 527

A

AAC 260, 316

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 540

Accessories and Modifications 615

Accessory Power Sockets 222

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow 491

Adding the Coolant 583

Additives

Coolant 582

Engine Oil 577

Washer 586

Additives, Engine Oil 577

Adjusting

Armrest 212

Front Seats 203

Head Restraints 209

Mirrors 201

Rear Seats 207

Steering Wheel 200

Temperature 125

Adjusting the Sound 251, 289

Agile Handling Assist 521

Air Conditioning System

(Climate Control System) 233

Changing the Mode 234

Defrosting the Windshield and

Audio/Information Screen…………….

247, 268

Windows ………………………………………..

234

Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout ..

272

Dust and Pollen Filter ………………………….

609

Changing the Screen Interface …………….

286

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ……………….

234

Closing Apps…………………………………….

288

Sensor ……………………………………………..

237

Customizing the Meter……………………….

273

Synchronization Mode ………………………..

236

Display Setup …………………………….

252, 290

Using Automatic Climate Control

………… 233

Error Messages………………………………….

337

Air Pressure …………………………………

597, 651

General Information …………………………..

342

Airbags ………………………………………………..

50

Home Screen…………………………………….

279

Advanced Airbags ……………………………….

56

HondaLink® …………………………………….

322

Airbag Care ………………………………………..

65

How to use Siri ® Eyes Free …………..

266, 329

Event Data Recorder ………………………………

0

iPod …………………………………………

255, 307

Front Airbags (SRS) ………………………………

53

Limitations for Manual Operation …………

291

Indicator ……………………………………….

62, 89

Menu Customize……………………………….

287

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ………………

63

MP3/WMA/AAC…………………………

260, 316

Sensors………………………………………………

50

MP4………………………………………………..

316

Side Airbags ……………………………………….

58

Pandora® …………………………………

258, 314

Side Curtain Airbags …………………………….

60

Playing Bluetooth® Audio …………….

263, 319

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ……………………….

527

Playing SiriusXM® Radio ……………………..

300

AM/FM Radio ………………………………

253, 296

Reactivating ……………………………………..

242

Android AutoTM ………………………………….

333

Recommended Devices……………………….

343

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………………

540

Remote Controls ……………………………….

243

Indicator …………………………………………….

89

Security Code……………………………………

242

Apple CarPlayTM ………………………………….

330

Selecting an Audio Source…………………..

291

Armrest ……………………………………………..

212

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) ………………………..

310

Audio Remote Controls……………………….

243

Status Area ………………………………………

285

Audio System ……………………….

240, 246, 267

Theft Protection ………………………………..

242

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

251, 289

USB Flash Drives ………………….

260, 316, 343

AM/FM Radio …………………………….

253, 296

USB Port(s) ……………………………………….

241

Android AutoTM …………………………………

333

Voice Control Operation……………………..

292

Apple CarPlayTM …………………………………

330

Wallpaper Setup…………………………

249, 277

Index

663

Index

WAV ……………………………………………….

260

Bluetooth® Audio ………………………..

263, 319

Cargo Hooks………………………………………

227

Wi-Fi Connection……………………………….

327

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ………..

396, 420

Carrying Cargo ……………………………

459, 461

Audio/Information Screen…………….

247, 268

Booster Seats (For Children) ………………….

79

Certification Label ……………………………..

652

Authorized Manuals……………………………

660

Brake System ……………………………………..

534

Changing Bulbs ………………………………….

587

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ……………..

153

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)……………….

540

Charging System Indicator …………….

87, 635

Customize ………………………………………..

133

Automatic Brake Hold ………………………..

538

Child Safety …………………………………………

66

Auto High-Beam …………………………………

186

Brake Assist System ……………………………

541

Childproof Door Locks ……………………….

152

Auto Idle Stop…………………………………….

482

Fluid………………………………………………..

585

Child Seat ……………………………………………

66

OFF Button ……………………………………….

483

Foot Brake………………………………………..

537

Booster Seats ……………………………………..

79

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green) ……………

95

Indicator (Red)………………………

84, 637, 638

Child Seat for Infants …………………………..

68

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator

Parking Brake ……………………………………

534

Child Seat for Small Children ………………..

69

(Amber) ……………………………………………..

96

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel)…. 194

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Automatic Brake Hold…………………………

538

Bulb Replacement ………………………………

587

Shoulder Seat Belt ……………………………..

74

Indicator ……………………………………..

86, 538

Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light

Larger Children …………………………………..

78

Automatic Intermittent Wipers ……………

192

and Rear Side Marker Lights ………………

589

Rear-facing Child Seat………………………….

68

Automatic Lighting …………………………….

182

Fog Lights ………………………………………..

589

Selecting a Child Seat ………………………….

70

Average Fuel Economy………………………..

121

Front Turn Signal/ Front Side Marker

Childproof Door Locks………………………..

152

Average Speed……………………………………

121

Lights …………………………………………….

589

Cleaning the Exterior………………………….

612

AWD (All-Wheel Drive) ……………………….

527

Headlights………………………………………..

587

Cleaning the Interior ………………………….

610

High-Mount Brake Light ……………………..

591

Climate Control System ………………………

233

B

Parking/Daytime Running Lights …………..

589

Changing the Mode…………………………..

233

Rear License Plate Light ………………………

591

Defrosting the Windshield and

Battery……………………………………………….

605

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator

Windows ……………………………………….

234

Charging System Indicator ……………..

87, 635

Lights …………………………………………….

589

Dust and Pollen Filter …………………………

609

If the Battery Is Dead ………………………….

629

Taillight and Back-Up Lights ………………..

590

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode……………….

234

Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ……..

605

Bulb Specifications ……………………………..

650

Sensors ……………………………………………

237

Maintenance (Replacing)……………………..

607

Synchronization Mode ……………………….

236

Belts (Seat) …………………………………………..

41

C

Using Automatic Climate Control…………

233

Beverage Holders………………………………..

220

Clock …………………………………………………

138

Blind spot information System …………….

522

Caller ID Information ………………………….

407

CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking

Indicator …………………………………………….

95

Carbon Monoxide Gas ………………………….

80

SystemTM) …………………………………………

542

664

Coat Hook 226

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 542

Compact Spare Tire 619, 651

Compass 454

Continuously Variable Transmission 479

Creeping 479

Fluid 584

Kickdown 479

Operating the Shift Lever 25, 481

Shift Lever Does Not Move 632

Shifting 480

Controls 137

Coolant (Engine) 582

Adding the Coolant 583

Overheating 633

Creeping

(Continuously Variable Transmission) 479

Cross Traffic Monitor 554

Cup Holders 220

Customer Service Information 661

Customized Features 127, 359, 366

D

Daytime Running Lights 190

Dead Battery 629

Defaulting All the Settings 392

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows 234

Detachable Anchor 47

Devices that Emit Radio Waves 653

Dimming

Headlights 181

Rearview Mirror 201

Dipstick (Engine Oil) 578

Directional Signals (Turn Signals) 180

Display Setup 252, 290

Display/Information Button 119

Door Mirrors 202

Doors 140

Auto Door Locking 153

Auto Door Unlocking 153

Keys 140

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside 151

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside 143

Lockout Prevention System 150

DOT Tire Quality Grading 599

Driver Information Interface 119

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support 203

Driving 457

Braking 534

Continuously Variable Transmission 479

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 469

Shifting Gear 480

Starting the Engine 471, 473

Driving Position Memory System 198

Dust and Pollen Filter 609

E

Eco Assist® System 12

ECON Button 488

Elapsed Time 121

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator 91, 639

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 519

Emergency 646

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) 655

Engine

Coolant 582

If the Battery Is Dead 629

Number 652

Oil 577

Starting 471, 473

Switch Buzzer 175, 178

Engine Coolant 582

Adding the Coolant 583

Overheating 633

Temperature Gauge 118

Engine Oil 577

Adding 579

Checking 578

Displaying Oil Life 570

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 87, 635

Recommended Engine Oil 577

ENGINE START/STOP Button 176

EPS (Electric Power Steering) System 639

Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 80

Exterior Care (Cleaning) 612

Exterior Mirrors 202

Index

665

Index

F

Features 239

Filters

Dust and Pollen 609

Oil 580

Flat Tire 619

Floor Mats 611

Fluids

Brake 585

Continuously Variable Transmission 584

Engine Coolant 582

Windshield Washer 586

FM/AM Radio 253, 296

Fog Light Indicator 93

Folding Down the Rear Seats 208

Foot Brake 537

Front Airbags (SRS) 53

Front Seat Heaters 230

Front Seats 203

Adjusting 203

Front Sensor Camera 489

Fuel 27, 560

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 563

Gauge 118

Instant Fuel Economy 125

Low Fuel Indicator 89

Range 121

Recommendation 560

Refueling 560

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 563

Fuel Fill Door 27, 561

Fuses 641

Inspecting and Changing 645

Locations 641, 642

G

Gasoline (Fuel)

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 563

Gauge 118

Information 560

Instant Fuel Economy 125

Low Fuel Indicator 89

Refueling 560

Gauges 118

Gear Shift Lever Positions

Continuously Variable Transmission 480

Glass (care) 610, 613

Glove Box 217

H

Handling the Unexpected 617

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) 396, 420

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook

and Call History 410, 433

Caller ID Information 407

Displaying Messages 448

HFL Buttons 396, 420

HFL Menus 398, 423

HFL Status Display 397, 422

In Case of Emergency 452

Limitations for Manual Operation 397, 422

Making a Call 414, 441

Options During a Call 419, 445

Phone Setup 402, 428

Phonebook Phonetic Modification 437

Receiving a Call 418, 444

Receiving a Text/E-mail Message 446

Ring Tone 407, 432

Selecting a Text/E-mail Message

Account 447

Speed Dial 411, 434

To Clear the System 409

To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options .. 431

Hazard Warning Button 6

HD RadioTM 296

Head Restraints 209

Headlights 181

Aiming 587

Auto High-Beam 186

Automatic Operation 182

Dimming 181

Operating 181

Heated Door Mirror Button 196

Heated Steering Wheel 229

Heated Windshield Button 197

Heaters (Front Seat) 230

Heaters (Seat) 231

Heating and Cooling System

Dust and Pollen Filter 609

HFL (HandsFreeLink®) 396, 420

High Beam Indicator 93

666

Hill Start Assist System 472, 477

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 393

Honda App License Agreement 344

Honda Sensing® 28

HondaLink® 322

I

Identification Numbers 652

Engine and Transmission 652

Vehicle Identification 652

If the Battery Is Dead 629

Ignition Switch 175

Illumination Control 194

Knob 194

Immobilizer System 165

Immobilizer System Indicator 94

Indicators 84

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow 98, 99, 491

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 89

Auto Idle Stop (Green) 95

Auto Idle Stop System (Amber) 96

Automatic Brake Hold 86, 538

Blind spot information System 95, 523

Charging System 87, 635

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 100, 101, 102

ECON Mode 95, 488

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

System 91, 639

Fog Light 93

High Beam 93

Immobilizer System 94

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 99, 100

Lights On 93

Low Fuel 89

Low Oil Pressure 87, 635

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS 91, 92, 532

Maintenance Minder 569

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 87, 636

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Amber) 85, 86

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Red) 84, 637, 638

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).. 96, 97, 98

Seat Belt Reminder 43, 88

Security System Alarm 94

Shift Lever Position 88

Supplemental Restraint System 62, 89

System Message 92

Transmission System 88

Turn Signal 93

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)

System 90, 519

VSA® OFF 90, 520

Information 649

Instant Fuel Economy 125

Instrument Panel 83

Brightness Control 194

Interior Lights 213

Interior Rearview Mirror 201

iPod 255, 307

J

Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) 622

K

Key Number Tag 141

Keyless Lockout Prevention 150

Keys 140

Lockout Prevention 150

Master Keys 140

Number Tag 141

Rear Door Won’t Open 152

Remote Transmitter 147

Types and Functions 140

Valet Key 141

Won’t Turn 31

Kickdown

(Continuously Variable Transmission) 479

L

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 511

LaneWatchTM 525

LATCH (Child Seats) 71, 76

Lights 181, 587

Auto High-Beam 186

Automatic 182

Bulb Replacement 587

Daytime Running Lights 190

Index

667

Index

Fog Lights…………………………………………

185

Cleaning ………………………………………….

610

High Beam Indicator …………………………….

93

Coolant……………………………………………

582

Interior …………………………………………….

213

Maintenance MinderTM ……………………….

569

Light Switches …………………………………..

181

Oil…………………………………………………..

578

Lights On Indicator ………………………………

93

Precautions ………………………………………

566

Turn Signals………………………………………

180

Remote Transmitter……………………………

607

Load Limits …………………………………………

461

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………………

587

Locking/Unlocking ………………………………

140

Safety………………………………………………

567

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ………………

153

Service Items …………………………………….

572

Childproof Door Locks ………………………..

152

Tires ………………………………………………..

596

From Inside……………………………………….

151

Transmission Fluid ……………………………..

584

From Outside…………………………………….

143

Under the Hood ………………………………..

575

Keys ………………………………………………..

140

Malfunction Indicator Lamp…………..

87, 636

Using a Key ………………………………………

149

Map Lights …………………………………………

215

Lockout Prevention System………………….

150

Maximum Load Limit ………………………….

461

Low Battery Charge…………………………….

635

Meters, Gauges…………………………………..

118

Low Fuel Indicator ………………………………..

89

Mirrors ………………………………………………

201

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ……………..

87, 635

Adjusting …………………………………………

201

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal

Door ……………………………………………….

202

Strength……………………………………………

142

Exterior ……………………………………………

202

Lower Anchors ………………………………..

71, 76

Interior Rearview ……………………………….

201

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)…………..

461

Modifications (and Accessories) …………..

615

Lumbar Support………………………………….

204

Moonroof ………………………………………….

171

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch …….

204

MP3 ……………………………………………

260, 316

Multi-View Rear Camera……………………..

558

M

Maintenance ………………………………………

565

N

Adding the Coolant ……………………………

583

Numbers (Identification)……………………..

652

Battery……………………………………………..

605

Brake Fluid………………………………………..

585

O

Odometer 120

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 469

Oil (Engine) 577

Adding 579

Checking 578

Displaying Oil Life 570

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 87, 635

Recommended Engine Oil 577

Viscosity 577

Open Source Licenses 358

Opening/Closing

Hood 576

Moonroof 171

Power Windows 168

Tailgate 154

Outside Temperature Display 125

Overheating 633

P

Pandora® 258, 314

Panic Mode 167

Panoramic Roof 172

Parking 552

Parking Brake 534

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (Amber) 85, 86

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (Red) 84, 637, 638

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 63

668

Passing Indicators 181

Playing Bluetooth® Audio 263, 319

Power Tailgate 156

Power Windows 168

Precautions While Driving 478

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility

Vehicle 478

Rain 478

Pregnant Women 48

Puncture (Tire) 619

R

Radio (FM/AM) 253, 296

Radio (SiriusXM®) 300

Radio Data System (RDS) 254, 299

Range 121

RDS (Radio Data System) 254, 299

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) 655

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control

SystemTM 527

Rear Seat Heaters 231

Rear Seats (Folding Down) 208

Rearview Mirror 201

Refueling 560

Fuel Gauge 118

Gasoline 560, 650

Low Fuel Indicator 89

Regulations 532, 599, 653

Remote Transmitter 147

Replacement

Battery 607

Bulbs 587

Fuses 641, 642

Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 594

Tires 602

Wiper Blade Rubber 592

Reporting Safety Defects 654

Resetting a Trip Meter 121

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) 507

On and Off 509

S

Safe Driving 35

Safety Check 40

Safety Labels 81

Safety Message 3

Seat Belts 41

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor 46

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 44

Checking 49

Detachable Anchor 47

Fastening 45

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Seat Belt 74

Pregnant Women 48

Reminder 43

Warning Indicator 43, 88

Seat Heaters 230, 231

Seats 203

Adjusting 203

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support 203

Front Seat Heaters 230

Front Seats 203

Rear Seats 207

Seat Heaters 230, 231

Security System 165

Security System Alarm Indicator 94

Select Lever 25, 480

Operation 25, 481

Releasing 632

Won’t Move 632

Selecting a Child Seat 70

Selector Knob (Audio) 246

Setting the Clock 138

Shift Lever 25, 480

Shift Lever Position Indicator 88, 481

Shifting (Transmission) 480

Shoulder Anchor 46

Side Airbags 58

Side Curtain Airbags 60

Siri® Eyes Free 266, 329

SiriusXM® Radio 300

Smart Entry System 143

Snow Tires 604

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) 310

Spare Tire 619, 651

Spark Plugs 650

Specifications 650

Specified Fuel 560, 650

Index

669

Index

Speedometer 118

SRS Airbags (Airbags) 53

Starting Assist Brake Function 487

Starting the Engine 471, 473

Does Not Start 626

Engine Switch Buzzer 175, 178

If the Battery Is Dead 629

Steering Wheel 200

Adjusting 200

Stopping 552

Summer Tires 604

Sunglasses Holder 228

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 53

Switches

(Around the Steering Wheel) 6, 7, 175

System Message Indicator 92

T

Tachometer 118

Tailgate 154

Unable to Open 647

Temperature

Outside Temperature Display 125

Temperature Sensor 125

Theft Protection 242

Time (Setting) 138

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) 528

Indicator 91, 92

Tires 596

Air Pressure 597, 651

Checking and Maintaining 596

Inspection 596

Labeling 597

Puncture (Flat Tire) 619

Regulations 599

Rotation 603

Spare Tire 619, 651

Summer 604

Tire Chains 604

Wear Indicators 601

Winter 604

Tonneau Cover 232

Tools 618

Towing a Trailer 463

Equipment and Accessories 464

Load Limits 463

Towing Your Vehicle 468

Behind a Motorhome 468

Emergency 646

TPMS

(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) 528

Indicator 91, 92

Transmission 480

Continuously Variable 480

Fluid 584

Number 652

Shift Lever Position Indicator 88, 481

TRIP Knob 120

Trip Meter 120

Troubleshooting 617

Blown Fuse 641, 642

Brake Pedal Vibrates 32

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door 32

Emergency Towing 646

Engine Won’t Start 626

Noise When Braking 33

Overheating 633

Puncture/Flat Tire 619

Rear Door Won’t Open 32, 152

Shift Lever Won’t Move 632

Warning Indicators 84

Turbo Engine Vehicle 564

Turn Signals 180

Indicators (Instrument Panel) 93

U

Under-floor Storage Area 219

Unlocking the Doors 143

Unlocking the Front Doors from the

Inside 17

USB Flash Drives 260, 316, 343

USB Port(s) 241

V

Valet Key 141

Vanity Mirrors 9

Vehicle Identification Number 652

670

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) …………..

519

Window Washers………………………………..

191

Off Button ……………………………………….

520

Adding/Refilling Fluid………………………….

586

Off Indicator ………………………………………

90

Switch ……………………………………………..

191

System Indicator …………………………………

90

Windows (Opening and Closing)………….

168

Viscosity (Oil)………………………………

577, 651

Windshield …………………………………………

191

Voice Control Operation …………………….

292

Cleaning……………………………………

610, 613

Audio Commands……………………………..

294

Defrosting/Defogging …………………………

234

Climate Control Commands………………..

295

Washer Fluid …………………………………….

586

General Commands …………………………..

295

Wiper Blades …………………………………….

592

Music Search Commands……………………

295

Wipers and Washers …………………………..

191

On Screen Commands ……………………….

295

Winter Tires ……………………………………….

604

Phone Commands …………………………….

294

Snow Tires………………………………………..

604

Useful Commands …………………………….

294

Tire Chains ……………………………………….

604

Voice Portal Screen ……………………………

293

Wipers and Washers……………………………

191

Voice Recognition ……………………………..

292

Automatic Intermittent Wipers……………..

192

VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) …………..

519

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades …..

592

Front ……………………………………………….

191

W

Rear ………………………………………………..

193

Wireless Charger…………………………………

223

Wallpaper…………………………………..

249, 277

WMA ………………………………………….

260, 316

Warning and Information Messages

…… 103

Worn Tires………………………………………….

596

Warning Indicator On/Blinking……………

635

Warning Labels ……………………………………

81

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately) ……………………………………….

657

Watts ………………………………………………..

650

WAV………………………………………………….

260

Wear Indicators (Tire) …………………………

601

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)………..

622

Wi-Fi Connection ……………………………….

327

Index

671

 

owners.honda.com (U.S.)

honda.ca (Canada)

31TLA640

2021 Honda CR-V Owner’s Manual

OM-14919

00X31-TLA-6400

© 2020 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

 

Leave a Reply 0

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *


This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.